NEC Express5800/120Eg

N8100-1078F/1079F
NEC Express5800/120Eg
User's Guide
1st Edition
7-2005
ONL-4137aN-120Eg-100-99-0507
856-124139-103-00
PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is the
valuable property of NEC Corporation (NEC) and /or its licensors. NEC and/or its licensors, as
appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other proprietary rights to this document, including all
design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and sales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are
expressly granted to others.
The NEC product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the
Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However, actual performance of each such
product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration, customer data, and operator control.
Since implementation by customers of each product may vary, the suitability of specific product
configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC.
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subject to
change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without
prior written approval of NEC is prohibited.
First Printing, July 2005
Copyright 2005
NEC Corporation
7-1 Shiba 5-Chome, Minato-Ku
Tokyo 108-8001, Japan
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan
Keep this manual at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.
SAFETY INDICATIONS
Follow the instructions in this manual for your safety to use the NEC Express server.
Your server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring
warnings, and preventive actions against such hazards.
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them
as well as described in this manual.
In this manual or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of danger.
These terms are defined as follows:
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious
personal injury if the instruction is ignored.
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury,
including burns, or property damage if the instruction is ignored.
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols.
individual symbols are defined as follows:
The
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard if the instruction is ignored.
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a
particular prohibited action. (Prohibited Action)
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a
mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)
(Example)
Symbol to draw attention
Term indicating a degree of danger
CAUTION
Hot surface
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as
hard disks are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully
cool down before installing/removing any component.
Symbol indicating a prohibited
action (may not always be
indicated)
Description of a danger
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL AND WARNING LABELS
Attentions
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.
Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam.
Prohibited Actions
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server.
may be caused.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire
Mandatory Action
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be
caused.
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified.
follow the instruction.
Make sure to
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Statement
Warning: This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).
BSMI Statement
Trademarks
NEC DianaScope, NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
ROM-DOS is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
LSI-Logic, MegaRAID, and Power Console Plus are registered trademarks or trademarks of LSI Logic Corp.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. of the United States.
AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of United States.
SCSISelect is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of the United States.
Adobe, Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States.
Promise Technology, Inc. is a registered trademark of Promise Technology, Inc. of the U.S.A.
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective trademark owners.
Windows XP stands for Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional operating system and Microsoft® Windows®
XP Home Edition operating system. Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server operating
system and Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server operating system, and Microsoft® Windows® 2000
Professional operating system. Windows 2003 stands for Microsoft® Windows Server 2003 operating
system and Microsoft® Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Enterprise Edition. Windows Me stands
for Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition operating system. Windows 98 stands for Microsoft®
Windows®98 operating system. Windows 95 stands for Microsoft® Windows®95 operating system.
Momentary voltage drop prevention:
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a
momentary voltage drop, an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.
Notes:
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of
NEC Corporation.
(2) The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
(3) The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission
of NEC Corporation.
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. If you
notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact the sales agent where you
purchased this product.
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or
consequential damages arising from the use of this manual regardless of Item (4).
(6) If you find any missing pages or pages out of order in this manual, please contact your dealer
for a replacement.
i
PREFACE
Congratulations on the purchase of your NEC Express server.
Purchase of this server is your assurance of receiving state-of-the-art, high quality hardware to meet
your needs, both now and in the future.
Read this User's Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the NEC Express server and
appreciate its functions to the maximum extent.
ii
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE
This manual is a guide for proper setup and use of your server.
This manual also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise
during setup or operation of your server.
Keep this manual for future use.
The following describes how to proceed with this manual.
How to Use This Manual
To aid you in finding information quickly, this manual contains the following information:
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server
includes information that needs attention to use the server. Make sure to read this chapter
before setting up and using the server. It also includes requirements and advisory information
for transfer and disposal of the server.
Chapter 2 General Description
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its
components, handling of the floppy disk and CD-ROM drives.
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections, and power on your
system.
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup Utility.
This chapter also provides information on mother board jumper settings and the onboard RAID
configuration utility.
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
describes how to install the operating system.
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities
describes how to install the utilities for the server.
attached CD-ROM "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER".
It also includes a description on using the
Chapter 7 Maintenance
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server.
This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server.
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor, optional
memory, optional add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power supply.
Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagram
includes cabling information for the two onboard SATA controller, the optional RAID controller,
and the power supply.
Appendix A Specification
provides specifications for your server.
Appendix B Other Precautions
provides supplementary notes on using the server.
iii
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address
provides a list of factory-set IRQs and I/O port addresses assigned.
Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions without using Express
Setup. Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions. See Chapter 5 for details.
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup. Using
the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003. See Chapter 5 for
details.
Appendix F Installing Windows 2000
describes how to install Microsoft Windows 2000 without using Express Setup. Using the
Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows 2000. See Chapter 5 for details.
Appendix G Product Configuration Record Table
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.
Text Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual. For safety symbols, see "SAFETY
INDICATIONS" provided earlier.
IMPORTANT:
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server
NOTE:
Helpful and convenient piece of information
IN THE PACKAGE
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make
sure that you have everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any
component missing or damaged, contact your sales agent.
„
Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need
them to install an optional device or troubleshoot your server, as well as to set it up.
„
Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the
master disk in a designated place, and use its copy.
„
Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system
environment. If you find anything unclear, immediately ask your sales agent for help.
iv
CONTENTS
Preface ..............................................................................................................................................i
About This User's Guide..................................................................................................................ii
In the Package.................................................................................................................................iii
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server........................................................................ 1-1
Warning Labels.............................................................................................................................1-2
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................1-3
General .....................................................................................................................................1-3
Power Supply and Power Cord Use .........................................................................................1-4
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection....................................................................1-5
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices...........................................................................1-6
During Operation .....................................................................................................................1-7
For Proper Operation ....................................................................................................................1-8
Transfer to Third Party .................................................................................................................1-9
Disposal and Consumables .........................................................................................................1-10
User Support...............................................................................................................................1-11
Chapter 2 General Description ..................................................................................... 2-1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................2-2
System Chassis .............................................................................................................................2-3
Front View................................................................................................................................2-3
Front View (Door Opened).......................................................................................................2-4
Rear View.................................................................................................................................2-6
Internal View ............................................................................................................................2-8
Mother Board..............................................................................................................................2-10
Standard Features .......................................................................................................................2-12
Power Supply .........................................................................................................................2-13
Peripheral Bays ......................................................................................................................2-13
Degradation Feature ...............................................................................................................2-14
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)..........................................................................2-14
AC-LINK Feature ..................................................................................................................2-14
Security ..................................................................................................................................2-15
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ....................................................................................................2-16
NEC ESMPRO.......................................................................................................................2-17
Off-line Maintenance Utility ..................................................................................................2-17
System Diagnostic Utility ......................................................................................................2-17
Using NEC Express Server.........................................................................................................2-18
Front Door..............................................................................................................................2-18
POWER Switch......................................................................................................................2-19
SLEEP Switch ........................................................................................................................2-23
Floppy Disk Drive..................................................................................................................2-24
CD-ROM Drive......................................................................................................................2-26
v
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server ................................................................................ 3-1
Setup Flow....................................................................................................................................3-2
Installing Optional Devices ..........................................................................................................3-3
Selecting Server Site.....................................................................................................................3-4
Connecting Peripheral Devices.....................................................................................................3-6
Connecting Power Cord................................................................................................................3-8
Turning On the Server ................................................................................................................3-10
Installing Operating System .......................................................................................................3-12
Installing Utilities .......................................................................................................................3-12
Making Backup Copies of System Information..........................................................................3-12
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server.............................................................................. 4-1
System BIOS (SETUP) ................................................................................................................4-1
Starting SETUP Utility.............................................................................................................4-2
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage .....................................................................4-3
Menu and Parameter Descriptions ...........................................................................................4-4
Configuring Mother Board Jumpers ...........................................................................................4-19
RAID Configuration Utility........................................................................................................4-21
Installing the Hard Disk Drives..............................................................................................4-21
Activating the SATA RAID Feature .......................................................................................4-21
Running the Array Configuration Utility (ACU) ...................................................................4-22
Using the Array Configuration Utility....................................................................................4-23
Add-in Card's BIOS....................................................................................................................4-31
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup............................... 5-1
About Express Setup ....................................................................................................................5-2
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 ..................................................................................................5-4
Installation Notice ....................................................................................................................5-4
The Flow of Setup ....................................................................................................................5-8
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.....................................................................................5-13
Setting for Solving Problems .................................................................................................5-19
Installing Maintenance Utilities .............................................................................................5-23
Updating the System ..............................................................................................................5-24
Making Backup Copies of System Information .....................................................................5-24
Exceptional Setup...................................................................................................................5-25
Microsoft Windows 2000 ...........................................................................................................5-26
Installation Notice ..................................................................................................................5-26
The Flow of Setup ..................................................................................................................5-30
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.....................................................................................5-36
Setting for Solving Problems .................................................................................................5-41
Installing Maintenance Utilities .............................................................................................5-44
Updating the System - Installing Service Pack - ....................................................................5-45
Making Backup Copies of System Information .....................................................................5-45
Exceptional Setup...................................................................................................................5-46
vi
HostRAID...................................................................................................................................5-47
Overview of HostRAID .........................................................................................................5-47
Notes ......................................................................................................................................5-48
HostRAID Setup Flow ...........................................................................................................5-49
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities ....................................................................... 6-1
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................6-2
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console.............................................6-4
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)................................6-9
Configuration Diskette Creator...................................................................................................6-10
NEC ESMPRO ...........................................................................................................................6-14
Functions and Features...........................................................................................................6-14
Adaptec Storage Manager - Browser Edition..........................................................................6-15
Promise Array Management .......................................................................................................6-15
Power Console Plus ....................................................................................................................6-16
Major Functions .....................................................................................................................6-16
Components............................................................................................................................6-16
Server Setup ...........................................................................................................................6-18
Management PC Setup ...........................................................................................................6-19
Chapter 7 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 7-1
Making Backup Copies ................................................................................................................7-1
Cleaning........................................................................................................................................7-2
Cleaning the Server ..................................................................................................................7-3
Cleaning the Interior.................................................................................................................7-4
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse.................................................................................................7-5
Cleaning CD-ROM ..................................................................................................................7-6
System Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................7-7
Test Items .................................................................................................................................7-7
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics............................................................................7-8
Relocating/Storing The Server....................................................................................................7-11
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 8-1
System Viewers ............................................................................................................................8-2
Lamps ...........................................................................................................................................8-3
LAN ACCESS Lamp ..............................................................................................................8-3
STATUS Lamp ........................................................................................................................8-3
POWER/SLEEP Lamp ............................................................................................................8-5
DISK ACCESS Lamp .............................................................................................................8-5
Access Lamps...........................................................................................................................8-5
LAN Connector Lamps ............................................................................................................8-6
Error Messages .............................................................................................................................8-7
Error Messages after Power-on ................................................................................................8-7
POST Error Messages ..............................................................................................................8-8
Beep Codes.............................................................................................................................8-11
vii
Solving Problems........................................................................................................................8-12
Problems with NEC Express Server.......................................................................................8-12
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ...............................................................8-17
Problems with Windows Server 2003 ....................................................................................8-17
Problems with Windows 2000................................................................................................8-18
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ............................................................................8-21
Problems with Express Setup .................................................................................................8-22
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration ...................................................................8-26
Problems with Master Control Menu .....................................................................................8-26
Collecting Event Log .............................................................................................................8-27
Collect Configuration Information .........................................................................................8-28
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information ......................................................................8-29
Memory Dump .......................................................................................................................8-29
Saving the Dump File.............................................................................................................8-30
Recovery for Windows 2000 System..........................................................................................8-31
Off-line Maintenance Utility ......................................................................................................8-33
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility...............................................................................8-33
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility ...............................................................................8-34
Resetting the Server....................................................................................................................8-35
Forced Shutdown........................................................................................................................8-36
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server ................................................................................ 9-1
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................9-2
Static Precautions .........................................................................................................................9-3
Preparing for Installation and Removal ........................................................................................9-4
Device Installation or Removal Procedure ...................................................................................9-5
Side Cover................................................................................................................................9-5
Processor Air Duct ...................................................................................................................9-7
Hard Disk .................................................................................................................................9-9
5.25-inch Device ....................................................................................................................9-15
PCI Board...............................................................................................................................9-19
RAID Controller Board..........................................................................................................9-23
Processor ................................................................................................................................9-28
DIMM ....................................................................................................................................9-34
Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagrams....................................................................... 10-1
Interface Cables ..........................................................................................................................10-2
Standard Configuration ..........................................................................................................10-2
SATA RAID Drive Configuration ..........................................................................................10-3
SCSI Hard Disk Drive Configuration.....................................................................................10-4
SCSI RAID Drive Configuration ...........................................................................................10-6
Hot-plug SCSI RAID Drive Configuration ............................................................................10-7
Power Cable................................................................................................................................10-8
Standard Configuration ..........................................................................................................10-8
Hot-plug SCSI RAID Drive Configuration ............................................................................10-9
viii
Appendix A
Specifications............................................................................................A-1
Appendix B
Other Precautions.....................................................................................B-1
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ...................................................................... B-1
Server Management Software ................................................................................................. B-1
Floppy Disk............................................................................................................................. B-1
CD-ROM................................................................................................................................. B-4
Tape Media.............................................................................................................................. B-4
Keyboard ................................................................................................................................. B-5
Mouse...................................................................................................................................... B-6
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address.........................................................................C-1
Appendix D
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions........................................D-1
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.................................................................D-1
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER......................................................D-1
Updating System .....................................................................................................................D-1
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ...........................D-2
Manual Installation when SATA HostRAID and N8103-75/80F/95 Keeps Connection .........D-2
MO Device ..............................................................................................................................D-2
Media such as DAT .................................................................................................................D-2
Partition Size ...........................................................................................................................D-3
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.............................................................................D-4
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"..D-4
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation ...........................................................D-6
Updating the System ...............................................................................................................D-9
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ................................................................................D-10
PROSet..................................................................................................................................D-10
Network Driver ..................................................................................................................... D-11
Optional Network Board Driver............................................................................................D-12
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75F/95)...............................................................D-13
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F) ..................................................................D-13
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information)..................................................D-14
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003 .............................................................. E-1
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 ...................................................................................... E-1
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...................................................... E-1
Installing Service Pack ............................................................................................................ E-1
Updating System ..................................................................................................................... E-2
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ........................... E-2
Manual Installation when S-ATA HostRAID and N8103-65F/75/78F/80F/89 Keeps
Connection .............................................................................................................................. E-2
MO Device .............................................................................................................................. E-2
Media such as DAT ................................................................................................................. E-2
Partition Size ........................................................................................................................... E-3
ix
Installing Windows Server 2003.................................................................................................. E-4
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" ..................... E-4
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ................................................................................ E-6
Upgrade Installation ................................................................................................................ E-8
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives .............................................................................. E-10
Updating the System ............................................................................................................. E-12
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ................................................................................ E-13
PROSet.................................................................................................................................. E-13
Network Driver ..................................................................................................................... E-14
Re-install the Network Driver ............................................................................................... E-15
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-65F/75)............................................................... E-15
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-56F/95)............................................................... E-16
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F) .................................................................. E-16
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File ....................................... E-17
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information).................................................. E-18
Appendix F Installing Windows 2000........................................................................... F-1
Before Installing Windows 2000 ................................................................................................. F-1
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...................................................... F-1
Installing Service Pack ............................................................................................................ F-1
Updating System ..................................................................................................................... F-2
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ........................... F-2
Manual Installation when S-ATA HostRAID and N8103-65F/75/78F/80F/89 Keeps
Connection .............................................................................................................................. F-2
MO Device .............................................................................................................................. F-2
Media such as DAT ................................................................................................................. F-2
Partition Size ........................................................................................................................... F-3
Installing Windows 2000 ............................................................................................................. F-4
Creating "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"................................. F-4
Windows 2000 Clean Installation............................................................................................ F-6
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives ............................................................................... F-8
Updating the System - Installing Service Pack - ................................................................... F-10
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings .................................................................................F-11
PROSet...................................................................................................................................F-11
Network Driver ..................................................................................................................... F-12
Re-install the Network Driver ............................................................................................... F-13
Graphics Accelerator Driver.................................................................................................. F-13
USB 2.0 Driver...................................................................................................................... F-14
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-65F/75)............................................................... F-14
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-56F/95)............................................................... F-14
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F) .................................................................. F-15
Available Switch Options for Windows 2000 Boot.ini File .................................................. F-16
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information).................................................. F-17
Appendix G
Product Configuration Record Table......................................................G-1
Hardware .................................................................................................................................G-1
Software ..................................................................................................................................G-4
x
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 1
Notes on Using Your Server
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.
1-2 Notes on Using Your Server
WARNING LABELS
The warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to
inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not
intentionally remove or damage any of the labels.)
If you find any labels totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your sales
representative.
Attached to
the internal
component.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-3
SAFETY NOTES
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure
proper and safe use of the server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.
General
WARNING
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly
affect human lives.
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices
concerning human lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and
devices, aeronautics and space devices, transportation facilities and devices;
and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. NEC assumes no liability for
any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the server
has been used in the above conditions.
Do not use the server if any smoke, odor, or noise is present.
If smoke, odor, or noise is present, immediately turn off the POWER switch and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet, then contact your sales agent.
Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire.
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or
openings in the floppy disk or CD-ROM drive. Doing so may cause an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper
clips) enter the server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric
shock, a fire, or a failure of the server. When such things accidentally enter the
server, immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the
outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your sales agent.
1-4 Notes on Using Your Server
Power Supply and Power Cord Use
WARNING
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to follow
this warning may cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
Plug in to a proper power source.
Use a proper wall outlet. Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or
a power leak.
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a cord that
does not meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and
cause a fire.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of
connections.
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may
cause a fire.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect contact)
may cause a fire. Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on
dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug, increasing the possibility of fire.
Use the authorized power cord only.
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized
power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a
damaged cord.
■ Do not stretch the cord harness.
■ Do not alter, modify, or repair the
power cord.
■ Do not pinch the power cord.
■ Do not bend the power cord.
■ Do not secure the power cord with
staples or equivalents.
■ Keep chemicals away from the
power cord.
■ Do not use any damaged power
cord. (Replace a damaged power
■ Do not twist the power cord.
■ Do not place any object on the
cord with a new one of the same
specifications. Ask your sales agent
power cord.
■ Do not bundle power cords.
for replacement.)
Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage.
The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with
this server and to use with the server, and its safety has been tested. Do not use
the attached power cord for any other purpose. Doing so may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-5
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection
CAUTION
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
Your server weighs max. 33 kg (depending on its hardware configuration).
Carrying the server only by yourself may strain your back. Hold the server
firmly by its bottom with at least three or more people. Do not hold the front
door to lift the server. The front door may be disengaged from the server,
causing personal injury.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire.
■ a dusty place
■ a humid place such as near a boiler
■ a place exposed to direct sunlight
■ an unstable place
Do not use or store the server in corrosive environment.
Avoid the usage or storage of your server in an environment which may be
exposed to corrosive gases, such as those including but not limited to: sulfur
dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia and/or ozone.
Avoid installing your server in a dusty environment or one that may be exposed
to corrosive materials such as sodium chloride and/or sulfur.
Avoid installing your server in an environment which may have excessive metal
flakes or conductive particles in the air.
Such environments may cause corrosion or short circuits within your server,
resulting in not only damage to your server, but may even lead to be a fire
hazard.
If there are any concerns regarding the environment at the planned site of
installation or storage, please contact your sales representative.
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to
a power source.
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power
outlet before installing/removing any optional internal device or
connecting/disconnecting any interface cable to/from the server. If the server
is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source, touching an
internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire
resulted from a short circuit.
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and
connector before connecting a cable. Using an authorized cable or connecting
a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.
■ Do not use any damaged cable connector.
■ Do not step on the cable.
■ Do not place any object on the cable.
■ Do not use the server with loose cable connections.
1-6 Notes on Using Your Server
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other
than described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an
electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
A laser beam used in the CD-ROM drive is harmful to the eyes. Do not look
into or insert a mirror into the drive while the drive is powered. If a laser beam
is caught in your eyes, you may lose your eyesight (the laser beam is invisible).
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Your server contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Placing
the lithium close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery,
contact your sales agent. Do not disassemble the server to replace or
recharge the battery by yourself.
Disconnect the power plug before accessing inside the server, or connecting the
peripherals.
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power
outlet before cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices.
Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a
power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off-powered.
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a
dry cloth. Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug,
which may cause a fire.
CAUTION
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as
hard disks are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully
cool down before installing/removing any component.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Always install a board firmly. An incompletely installed board may cause a
contact failure, resulting in smoking or fire.
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with the protective cap
to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards. When removing the power
supply cable connector from the internal devices, attach the protective cap to the
connector. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-7
During Operation
CAUTION
Stay away from the fan.
Keep your hand or hair away from the cooling fan on the rear of the server.
Failure to follow this warning may get your hand or hair caught in the fan,
resulting in injury.
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet when a thunderstorm is approaching.
If it starts thundering before you disconnect the power plug, do not touch any
part of the server including the cables. Failure to follow this warning may cause
a fire or an electric shock.
Keep animals away from the server.
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Do not place any object on top of the server.
The server may fall and cause property damage to the surroundings.
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server.
Turn off the cellular phone or pager. Radio interference may cause
malfunctions of the server.
1-8 Notes on Using Your Server
FOR PROPER OPERATION
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server.
notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server.
Use of the server ignoring the
„
Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation. For details,
see Chapter 3, "Setting Up Your Server."
„
Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the
server and peripheral devices.
„
Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting
the floppy disk.
„
When plugging the power cord to the system, you may experience 10 seconds delay from
the time you press the POWER switch on the front panel. This is normal system
operation.
„
When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back
on.
„
Do not turn off the server until characters appear on the screen.
„
For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a disk with
the CD drive is not guaranteed.
„
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.
„
Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 7 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning
proactively prevents various failures of the server.
„
Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is
recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit.
„
Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions
is applicable.
„
– After carriage of device
– After storage of device
– After the device is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition
enduring device operation (temperature: 10°C - 35°C, humidity: 20% - 80%)
Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the system clock is
installed in a system requiring high time precision, it is recommended to use a time server
(NTP server).
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of
adjustment, contact your sales agent to ask maintenance.
„
Store the unit under the storage condition (temperature: –10°C - 55°C, humidity: 20% 80%, without condensation) to allow built-in devices and the unit to operate correctly in
the next operation.
„
Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices
may be physically installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as
malfunctions of the server.
„
NEC recommends you use NEC's genuine products. Some third-party products claim
that they support the server. However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage
resulted from use of such third-party products will be charged.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-9
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the
server to a third party:
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.
IMPORTANT: It is the user's responsibility to completely erase or
modify all the data stored in storage device such as hard disk so that the
data cannot be restored.
Provided software
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following
requirements must be satisfied:
„
All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be
retained.
„
Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each
software application must be satisfied.
„
Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before
transferring the server.
1-10 Notes on Using Your Server
DISPOSAL AND CONSUMABLES
„
Dispose the server, all the internal devices, floppy disks, and CD-ROMs according to all
national laws and regulations.
IMPORTANT:
„
„
For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the mother board of
the server, consult with your sales agent. In addition, dispose of the
provided power cord along with the server to prevent the diversion
to other devices.
„
It is the user's responsibility to completely erase or modify all the
data stored in storage device such as hard disk so that the data
cannot be restored.
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and
require replacement, such as fans, internal batteries, the internal CD-ROM drive, the
floppy disk drive, and the mouse. For stable operation of the server, NEC recommends
you replace these components on a regular basis. Consult with your sales agent for
replacement or the product lives.
WARNING
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Your contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Placing the
lithium or nickel cadmium battery close to a fire or in the water may cause an
explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery,
contact your sales agent. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge
the battery by yourself.
Mother board
Notes on Using Your Server 1-11
USER SUPPORT
Before Asking for Repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:
1.
Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.
2.
See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the
recommended measure for it.
3.
Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, consult with your sales agent
immediately. Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on the display
unit before consultation, which may provide a significant help to your sale agent.
1-12 Notes on Using Your Server
Advice for Health
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become
tired, which may cause disorders of your body. When you use a
computer, observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired:
Good Working Posture
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a
computer:
• You sit on a chair with your back straight.
• Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the
keyboard.
• You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part
of your body is under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are
most relaxed.
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you
operate a display unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working
posture may cause eye strain or poor eyesight.
Adjustment of Display Unit Angles
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and
vertical angles. This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from
reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy to see. You
will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you will feel more tired
than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal
and vertical angles.
Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The
most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the
working environment (well-lighted room or insufficient light). Adjust
brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to see. An
extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.
Adjustment of Keyboard Angle
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an
angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to
operate. The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders,
arms, and fingers.
Cleaning of Equipment
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a
dusty screen. Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.
Fatigue and Rest
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.
Chapter 2
General Description
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It
includes names and functions of the components and features of the server.
2-2 General Description
OVERVIEW
Your server is a modular, multiprocessing server based on the Intel® Xeon microprocessor family.
It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology. The combination of compute performance,
memory capacity, and integrated I/O provides a high performance environment for many server
market applications. These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small
companies looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such a file and print services, e-mail, web
access, web site server, etc.
This server is conveniently housed and available as a tower-based system or as a rack-mount system
(fits into a standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly).
Tower-based System Front View
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional processor,
additional memory, add-in boards and peripheral devices; tape devices, CD-ROM, and hard disk
drives.
The server features the following major components.
„
A high-performance Intel Pentium Xeon processor (up to two processors)
„
A high-performance synchronous system bus to interconnect the CPU and memory
subsystems with a bridge to expansion bus I/O.
„
On-board enhanced SATA interface controller
„
Five integrated I/O expansion PCI slots
„
Up to 8GB of ECC memory (using 2GB DIMMs). Minimum configuration is 512MB of
memory
„
Integrated CD-ROM and 1.44MB diskette
„
Four hard disk expansion bays
„
Four removable media expansion bays
„
High degree of hard disk drive fault tolerance and advanced disk array management
features through the use of onboard HostRAID Technology or the optional RAID
controller.
General Description 2-3
SYSTEM CHASSIS
Names and functions of the components are shown below.
Front View
2
1
4
5
6
7
3
1
Front door
Open this door to access the POWER switch, 5.25-inch devices, the CD-ROM drive, or the
floppy disk drive, or to install/remove hard disks to 3.5-inch bays. You can lock the front door
using the provided security key.
2
Key hole
Insert the security key to lock/unlock the front door.
3
Stabilizers (4)
Use the stabilizers to prevent the server from falling down.
4
LAN ACCESS lamp (green)
Lights in green while the server is connected to the network. Blinking in green indicates the
network activity.
DISK ACCESS lamp (green)
Lights in green while the internal hard disk is in access.
5
6
7
POWER/SLEEP lamp (green)
Lights in green when the server is powered on.
when the system is placed in the sleep mode.
When the server is powered off. Blinks
STATUS lamp (green/amber)
Lights in green while the server is in successful operation.
lamp lights in amber.
When any error is detected, this
2-4 General Description
Front View (Door Opened)
1
5
2
Not functioned
6
1
2
7
8
3-4
3-3
3-2
6
3-1
4
4-1
4-2
4-3
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
CD-ROM Drive
2-5
2-6
Floppy Disk Drive
General Description 2-5
1
5.25-inch device bay (4)
Backup file device may be installed in the 5.25-inch device bay.
The server can include a maximum of two devices.
2
CD-ROM drive
The CD-ROM drive reads data from the inserted CD-ROM.
2-1 Headphone jack
2-2 Volume control
2-3 Access lamp (lights in amber while being accessed)
2-4 CD-ROM slot
2-5 Emergency hole
2-6 Open/Close button
Hard disk drive bay
The hard disk drive bay contains up to four hard disk drives. Hard disk drives are installed
from the bottom to top of the hard disk drive bay.
3.5-inch floppy disk drive
Insert a 3.5-inch floppy disk to the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write
data to the disk.
4-1: Eject button
4-2: Disk inserting section
4-3: Floppy disk access lamp (lit green during accessing)
3
4
5
Power switch
The power switch is used to turn on/off the power. If you press the switch once, then the
POWER/SLEEP lamp goes on and the power is turned on. If you press the switch again, the
power is turned off. The system is forcibly shut down when the power switch is pressed
continuously for four seconds or longer.
6
Lamps (see the figure on the previous page)
7
Reset switch
The reset switch is used to reset the server.
8
Dump switch (NMI switch)
Non-maskable Interrupt switch.
The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server.
2-6 General Description
Rear View
6
5
1
2
7
8
9
10
3
11
12
13
4
General Description 2-7
1
Power supply
The power unit supplies DC powers to the server.
2
AC inlet
The AC inlet is connected with the power cord.
3
Serial port B connector
The serial port B connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface.
The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector.
4
Additional PCI board slots
Optional PCI boards may be inserted into the slots.
5
Mouse connector
The mouse connector is connected with the mouse coming with the server.
6
USB-1 (left) / USB-2 (right) connectors
The USB-1 and USB-2 connectors are connected with devices accepting the USB interface.
7
Keyboard connector
The keyboard connector is connected with keyboard coming with the server.
8
Monitor connector
The monitor connector is connected with the display unit.
9
Serial port A connector
The serial port A connector is connected with a device having the serial interface.
10
11
Maintenance LEDs
Link/ACT lamp
The Link/ACT lamp shows the LAN access status.
12
LAN connector
The LAN connector is connected with a network system on LAN (1000BASE-T/100BASETX/10BASE-T).
13
1000/100/10 lamp
1000/100/10 lamp indicates the LAN transfer rate.
2-8 General Description
Internal View
1
2
3
4-#4
4-#3
4-#2
8
4-#1
5
7
6
General Description 2-9
1
Power supply
2
Processor air duct
3
Front cooling fan
4
5.25-inch device bays (four slots)
5
A standard CD-ROM drive is installed in slot #2. The device bay can include a maximum of two
single-height device and one double-height device.
3.5-inch floppy disk drive
6
Hard disk drive bay
Hard disk drive bay can be equipped with four hard disk drives.
7
Mother board
8
Rear cooling fan
2-10 General Description
MOTHER BOARD
1
2
3
1
4
2
19
5
2
18
17
2
16
6
7
8
15
14
12 2
13
11
2
10
2
2
9
2
General Description 2-11
1
Power connector
2
Not used in this system
3
DIMM sockets (sockets #1B, #1A, #2B, and #2A arranged from left to right)
4
CPU1 socket
5
CPU2 socket
6
Floppy disk drive connector
7
Ultra ATA66 connector (for CD-ROM drive)
8
Front cooling fan connector
9
Front panel interface connector
10
Serial ATA connectors (for built-in hard disk drives)
11
Speaker
12
Configuration jumper switch (password)
13
Configuration jumper switch (CMOS)
14
Serial (COM B) connector
15
LED connector
16
PCI board slots
(slots PCI #1, PCI #2, PCI #3, PCI #4, and PCI #5 arranged from bottom to top)
PCI #5:
32-bit/33MHz PCI
PCI #4:
PCI EXPRESS
PCI #3:
32-bit/33MHz PCI
PCI #2 and #1: 64-bit/66MHz PCI-X
17
Lithium battery
18
Rear cooling fan connector
19
External connection connector
2-12 General Description
STANDARD FEATURES
High performance
„ Intel Xeon Processor
„ DDR333 integrated SDRAM
„ High-speed 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/
10BASE-T interface
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)
„ High-speed disk access
(Two serial ATA channels)
Expandability
„ Wide variety of optional I/O slots
Two 64-bit, 66MHz PCI-X slots
Two 32-bit, 33MHz PCI slot
One PCI EXPRESS Slot
„ Large memory of up to 4 GB
„ Four hard disk drive bays
„ Remote power-on feature
„ Up to two Intel Xeon processors
„ USB interface (A USB-support driver is
required.)
„ Convert to rack-mount type (N8143-56F
Rack Conversion Kit is required.)
High-reliability
Many Available Features
„ Memory monitoring feature (single-bit
„ Graphic accelerator "RAGE XL" support
„ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no emulation
error correction/double-bit error detection)
„ CPU/memory degradation feature (logical
mode) format support
„ POWER switch mask
isolation of a failed device)
„ Temperature detection
„ Software power-off
„ Error notification
„ Remote power-on feature
„ AC-LINK feature
„ Internal fan monitoring feature
„ Internal voltage monitoring feature
Self-diagnosis
„ BIOS password feature
„ Security feature (security lock)
„ Power On Self-Test (POST)
„ Disk array (option)
„ Test and Diagnosis
„ Hot Swap SATA/SCSI HDD (optional)
Management Utilities
„ NEC ESMPRO
Maintenance Features
„ Memory dump feature using the DUMP
(NMI) switch
Power Saving Feature
„ Sleep feature
(available for Windows 20003/2000)
Easy and Fine Setup
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup
utility)
„ Onboard SATA RAID configuration utility
„ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)
„ Configuration Diskette Creator
General Description 2-13
Power Supply
The system contains one auto-sensing 625-watt power supply at an operating frequency of 50/60
Hz.
The power supply is designed to comply with existing emission standards and provide sufficient
power for a fully loaded system configuration.
Peripheral Bays
The system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. The chassis
includes these peripheral bays:
„
A 3.5-inch front panel bay for installing the standard 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (supports
720KB and 1.44MB floppy disk media)
„
Four 5.25-inch device bays for installing half-height or full-height 5.25-inch peripheral
devices such as an optional tape drives.
„
The hard disk drive bays for installing up to four hard disk drives.
2-14 General Description
Degradation Feature
The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM or processor to assure continuous
operation of the server when the POST (Power On Self-Test, self-diagnosis program after power on)
detects such a DIMM or processor.
Failed DIMMs and processors may be identified on the screen that the POST displays, or with the
BIOS SETUP utility. They may also be identified on the system that has the NEC ESMPRO
installed.
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet
from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for each submenu in the Advanced Chipset
Control of the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility. (See Chapter 4.)
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER switch
once to start the OS, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.
„
Abnormal previous system shut-down
„
No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power
blackout, etc.)
AC-LINK Feature
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the
server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS
to the server. The AC-LINK feature can be enabled or disabled with the Server menu of the BIOS
SETUP utility. (See Chapter 4.)
General Description 2-15
Security
The BIOS SETUP utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or
accidental access to the system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is
allowed only after the user enters the correct password(s). For example:
„
Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the
keyboard and mouse after a specified time-out period – 2 to 120 minutes.
„
Set and enable an administrative password.
„
Set and enable a user password
„
Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel
reset and power switches.
„
Activate a hot-key combination to enter secure mode quickly.
„
Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set.
2-16 General Description
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The CD-ROM that comes with your server contains a setup utility called "NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER." When you have first installed the server or append features to the server,
use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to set up your server.
Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are:
„
To install the OS.
It installs an operating system.
„
To diagnose the system.
It diagnoses the server.
„
To create a support disk.
It copies utilities in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into a floppy disk to launch
them from the floppy disk.
„
To update the BIOS
It updates the BIOS features of the server.
„
To update the Windows System*
It updates the several resources of Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows
2000.
„
To install the utilities*
It install the management utilities of NEC ESMPRO.
„
To read the online documents*
It opens the online document files (".pdf" files).
* These functions are available under Windows system.
General Description 2-17
NEC ESMPRO
The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the OS. The NEC ESMPRO
includes the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and the NEC ESMPRO
Agent for the NEC Express server.
NOTE: For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO, system
configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO, see Chapter 6.
Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the OS you install.
Ask your sales agent for details.
Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for proactive maintenance and fault analysis of the server.
Normally this utility is used by the maintenance engineer.
Refer to Chapter 8 for details.
System Diagnostic Utility
The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to prevent the
hardware failures. See Chapter 7 for details.
2-18 General Description
USING NEC EXPRESS SERVER
This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as the
floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive. See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk, CDROM, and accessories including the keyboard and the mouse.
Front Door
Open the front door to power on/off the server, to access the floppy disk drive, CD-ROM drive, and
5.25-inch devices, and to install/remove hard disks to the 3.5-inch device bays.
1
Lock
2
Unlock
IMPORTANT: To open the front door, you must unlock the door with
the provided security key.
Insert the provided security key into the key hole and turn the key to unlock the front door. Then,
hold the front door edges and gently pull the door away from the computer chassis. When you
close the front door, lock the door with the key for security.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the front door by hanging the handle at
the upper left corner with your claws. If the front door cannot be
opened easily, hold the upper left and lower left corners of the front
door with your hands and then pull it out toward you.
General Description 2-19
POWER Switch
Use the POWER switch to turn on/off the server.
Power On
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp lights in green.
POWER/SLEEP lamp
IMPORTANT:
„
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), make sure that the power
control device is powered.
„
If the power cord is connected to the server, an initial diagnosis of
the hardware starts. The POWER switch does not work while in
diagnosis. Wait for about 10 seconds, then press the POWER
switch.
„
Always allow POST to complete before powering down your
system (see the next subsection for POST).
2-20 General Description
POST
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnostic program stored in the system memory.
When you power on the server, the system automatically runs POST to check the mother board,
ECC memory module, CPU module, keyboard, and mouse. POST also displays messages of the
BIOS setup utility, such as the start-up message, while in progress.
With the factory setup of the server, the NEC logo appears on the display unit while POST is in
progress. (To display the POST check results, press Esc.)
You don't always need to check the POST check results. Check messages that POST displays
when:
„
you use the NEC Express server for the first time.
„
the server appears to fail.
„
the server beeps for many times between power-on and OS start-up.
„
an error message appears on the display unit.
General Description 2-21
POST Execution Flow
The following describes the progress of POST in the chronological order.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not make key entries or perform mouse operations while POST
is in progress.
„
Some system configurations may display the message "Press Any
Key" to prompt a key entry. This message is driven by BIOS of an
installed optional board. Make sure to read the manual that comes
with the optional board before any key entry.
„
Powering on the server, after you installed or removed an optional
PCI board or moved it to another slot, may display the message that
indicates incorrect board configuration and suspend POST.
In such a case, press F1 to continue POST. Board configuration
can be made using the utility described later.
1.
After a few seconds from power-on, POST starts checking the memory. The count
message of the basic and expansion memory appears at top left on the display unit screen.
The memory check may takes a few minutes to complete depending on the memory size
of the NEC Express server. Also, it may take approximately one minute for the screen
display to appear after rebooting the server.
2.
Some messages appear upon completion of the memory check. These messages appear
to indicate that the system has detected the CPU, keyboard, and mouse.
3.
After a few seconds, POST displays the following message prompting you to launch the
BIOS setup utility, SETUP, stored in the system memory of the server. This message
appears at bottom left on the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or Press <F12> to Network
Launch the BIOS SETUP utility when you need to change the settings to meet the
requirements for the server. As long as the above message is not displayed with an error
message, you don't have to launch the utility. (Ignore the message. POST will
automatically proceed.)
To launch the SETUP utility, press F2 while the above message is displayed. See
Chapter 4 for setup and parameters.
The server automatically restarts POST all over again when you exit the SETUP utility.
Press F12 to start the operating system from the network drive.
4.
If your server uses onboard serial ATA (SATA) RAID feature, the following message is
displayed on the screen to prompt you to run Array Configuration Utility (ARC).
Press <Ctrl><A> for Adaptec RAID Configuration Utility
Press Ctrl + A to run ARC. For detail explanation, refer to Chapter 4.
2-22 General Description
5.
If the server has an optional RAID controller or SCSI card, POST displays the message
prompting you to launch the RAID configuration utility and the disk array BIOS setup
utility.
Refer to the manual supplied with the disk array controller for detail instructions.
POST will automatically proceed a few seconds later.
6.
If you set a password using the BIOS SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears
upon successful completion of POST.
Up to three password entries will be accepted. Three incorrect password entries disable
the server to boot. In such a case, turn off the power and wait about ten seconds before
turning on to boot the server.
IMPORTANT: Do not set a password before installing an OS.
7.
The OS starts when POST completes.
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. See Chapter
8 for POST error codes.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before
consulting with your sales agent. Alarm messages are useful
information for maintenance.
Power Off
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to
a UPS, refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls
the UPS.
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the
server.
1.
Shut down the OS.
2.
Press the POWER switch on the front of the server.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.
3.
Power off peripheral devices.
General Description 2-23
SLEEP Switch
You can use the POWER switch as the SLEEP switch if the ACPI compliant operating system is
installed in your system.
The SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server (power-saving mode or sleep
mode).
POWER/SLEEP lamp
Press the SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power-saving mode.
(The POWER/SLEEP lamp blinks.) In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory data
and the status of the previous operations.
To resume the original state, press the SLEEP switch again. (It may take a little time to resume the
original state.)
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on
the OS in use. (Available for the Windows operating system.)
IMPORTANT: Do not change system configuration while turning into
the power-saving mode or in the power-saving mode. Otherwise, you
may fail to resume the original state.
2-24 General Description
Floppy Disk Drive
Your server is provided with the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on its front to write/read data to/from a
floppy disk.
Your server supports the following 3.5-inch floppy disks:
„
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44MB.
„
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Store data of 720KB.
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before inserting a floppy disk
into the floppy disk drive.
When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, the drive clicks and the eject
button on the floppy disk is slightly pushed out.
NOTES:
„
You cannot use a 1.2MB-formatted floppy disk to boot the system.
„
When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted, the message notifying
that date read is not available and the message prompting formatting
are displayed. Refer to the manual that comes with the OS to
format the floppy disk.
„
If the floppy disk contains a system, powering on or restarting the
server with the floppy disk inserted boots the system from the
floppy disk.
To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, press the eject button.
NOTE: Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlit before
ejecting the floppy disk. Ejecting the disk when the access lamp is lit
may destroy the disk data.
General Description 2-25
NOTE: Use of the floppy disk
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate
structure and requires care. Keep the following notes in mind to use
it:
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it
goes.
„
Attach the label to the correct position.
„
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or
ball-point pen.
„
Do not open the shutter.
„
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
„
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place
exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater).
„
Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke.
„
Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid (e.g., water) and
chemicals.
„
Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects (e.g.,
magnet).
„
Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it.
„
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from
magnetism and dust.
„
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data
from accidental erasure. You can read data from a write-protected
floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format
it. NEC recommends that you should write-protect any floppy disk
containing valuable data unless you are about to save data. To
write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch
provided on its back.
Write-protect switch
Write
Write
disable enable
„
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal
changes, as well as operator's misconduct or sever failures, may
cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, NEC recommends that
you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a regular
basis. (Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk
provided with the server.)
2-26 General Description
CD-ROM Drive
Your server is provided with the CD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD-ROM (readonly compact disk). The CD-ROM provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
Do not leave the tray ejected from the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE: Depending on your order, the DVD-RAM drive may be
installed at the factory.
Setting and Removing the CD-ROM
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before inserting a CD-ROM
into the CD-ROM drive.
Press the Open/Close button on the front of the CD-ROM drive to eject the tray. With the CDROM label facing up, place a CD-ROM in the tray gently and securely.
Open/Close button
Press the Open/Close button or gently push on the tray front. The tray is automatically retracted
into the CD-ROM drive.
General Description 2-27
IMPORTANT: If the CD-ROM drive produces large noise after the
setting of a CD-ROM, reload the CD-ROM.
To remove a CD-ROM, press the Open/Close button to eject the tray, as described for inserting it,
and then take the CD-ROM out of the tray. (The orange-lit access lamp indicates ongoing disk
access. The Open/Close button does not work while the lamp is lit.)
Your OS may have a command to eject the tray.
When you have taken out the CD-ROM, retract the tray back in place.
When you fail to eject:
When you fail to eject the CD-ROM tray with the Open/Close button and take out the CD-ROM
from the server, follow the procedure below.
1.
Press the POWER switch to power off the server. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)
2.
Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length (a
straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the emergency hole on the right
front of the CD-ROM drive and gently push it in until the tray is ejected.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.
„
If the above procedure does not let you take out the CD-ROM,
contact your sales agent.
3.
Hold the tray and pull it out.
4.
Take out the CD-ROM.
5.
Push the tray back into position.
2-28 General Description
Use of the CD-ROM
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:
„
For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard, the playback of such a disk with
the CD drive is not guaranteed.
„
Do not drop the CD-ROM.
„
Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.
„
Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.
„
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
„
Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
„
Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point
pen.
„
Keep the CD-ROM away from cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its
center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.
„
Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or
thinner.
„
Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.
„
If the CD-ROM emits large noise in the CD-ROM drive, remove the CD-ROM and insert
it back again.
Chapter 3
Setting Up Your Server
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step
basis.
3-2 Setting Up Your Server
SETUP FLOW
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.
Installing optional devices
If you have purchased any optional device for the server, see Chapter 9 to install it.
Selecting the server site
Select a suitable site for the server.
Connecting peripheral devices
Connect peripheral devices to the server.
Connecting the power cord
Connect the power cord to the server.
Turning on the server
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.
Installing the operating system
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5.
Installing the utilities
Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
See Chapter 6.
Making backup copies of system information
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system
information.
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after
replacing the system board.
Setting Up Your Server
INSTALLING OPTIONAL DEVICES
To install any optional device, see Chapter 9, "Upgrading Your Server," for the installation
procedure. Proceed to the next section if you have no optional devices to install.
IMPORTANT: There are third-party products (memory modules, hard
disks, etc.) available for the server in the markets. However, NEC
recommends that you should use NEC products for stable operation.
NEC assumes no liability for data errors and failures due to malfunction
of the server resulted from installation of those third-party products.
3-3
3-4 Setting Up Your Server
SELECTING SERVER SITE
Read the following precautions before selecting a suitable site for your server. The following
describes installation of the server and connections to the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not use or store the server in corrosive environment.
The following figure illustrates a site suitable for installing the server.
Room that satisfies the following
conditions for operation: *
Temperature: 10 to 35ºC
Humidity: 20 to 80% (no
condensation)
* It is recommended that the server should be used in
a room where temperature is in the range between
15 to 25ºC.
Close enough to
connect the mouse
and the display.
100 to 120 Vac/200 to
240 Vac parallel bipolar wall power outlet
with the ground line.
Wall outlet to
connect the
supplied power
cord.
Install the server on the
floor or rigid, flat desk.
Clean and tidy room
Place having a space enough to fully
open the front door (The front door
extrudes about 35 mm from the left
side of the server when fully opened.)
UPS to prevent momentary
voltage drop due to power
failure or lightning *
* Optional. UPS is
recommended for best
use of features of server.
Setting Up Your Server
3-5
When you have selected a server site, hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons and
carry it to the site, then place it slowly and gently.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the server by its front door to lift the
server. The front door may be disengaged and damage the server.
Do not install the server in the following locations as it may cause malfunctions of the server.
„
Places with drastic changes in temperature (e.g., near a heater, air conditioner, or
refrigerator)
„
Places with strong vibration
„
Places with corrosive gas in presence, near chemicals, or with possibilities of chemicals
sprayed over
„
On a non-antistatic carpet
„
Places with possibilities of falling objects
„
Places where a power outlet that shares the ground line with another (especially the one to
which a device with large power consumption is connected) must be used for the server
„
Do not install the server near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at
power-on/power-off of commercial power supply through a relay). (To install the server
near equipment that generates power noise, ask your sales agent for separating the power
wiring or installing a noise filter.)
3-6 Setting Up Your Server
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for wide variety
of peripheral devices. The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for the
server in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
■
Do not use any damaged cable connector.
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Do not use the server with any loose interface connection.
Do not step on the interface cable or place any heavy object on it.
IMPORTANT:
„
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection.
Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will
cause malfunctions and failures.
„
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the
server, consult with your sales agent for availability of such a device
or cable. Some third-party devices may not be used for the server.
„
To connect the provided keyboard and mouse, plug their connectors
to the server with the "∆" mark on the connectors facing right.
„
Do not connect the serial ports with the telephone line directly.
Setting Up Your Server
Device with the USB
interface
(e.g., terminal adapter)
3-7
Connect
appropriate
power source.
Mouse
Keyboard
Display unit
Hub
(multiport repeater)
Device with the serial
interface (e.g., modem)*
* Direct connection to the private telephone line is prohibited.
REAR
Device with the serial interface
(e.g., modem)*
3-8 Setting Up Your Server
CONNECTING POWER CORD
Connect the provided power cord to the server.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 13 to 1-8 for details.
■
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
■
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of
connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Use the authorized power cord only.
1.
Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the server.
2.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.
Setting Up Your Server
3-9
To connect the power cord from the server to an interruptive power supply (UPS), use service
outlets on the rear of the UPS.
The UPS service outlets are categorized into two groups: SWITCH OUT and UN-SWITCH OUT.
(They may be called "OUTPUT1" and "OUTPUT2".)
To control power supply with an application (NEC ESMPRO UPSController) that controls the UPS,
connect the power cord to a SWITCH OUT outlet.
For constant power supply, connect the power cord to a UN-SWITCH OUT outlet. (Connect the
modem that is in service for 24 hours to this outlet.)
<Example>
UN-SWITCH OUT
(OUTPUT 2)
SWITCH OUT
(OUTPUT 1)
When the power cord from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to link with
power supply from the UPS.
Change a parameter for "Resume on AC Power Loss" under the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP
utility. See Chapter 4 for details.
3-10 Setting Up Your Server
TURNING ON THE SERVER
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.
IMPORTANT: Before turning on the server:
„
Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before
installation. If the server has a PCI board with the PCI-to-PCI
bridge installed, the SETUP utility is enabled to launch. Check on
the board specifications to find out whether it requires preinstallation setups before actually installing the board.
„
Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices
require setups before proceeding to the next step.
1.
Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the CD-ROM drive
contains no bootable CD-ROM.
2.
Press the POWER switch.
NOTES:
„
If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the
UPS, turn on the power control unit.
„
Connect the power cord and wait a few seconds before pressing the
POWER switch. The POWER switch does not work in a few
seconds after connecting the power cord due to firmware start-up.
POWER/SLEEP lamp
Setting Up Your Server
3-11
The POWER/SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on.
In a few seconds, the NEC logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test (POST)
begins.
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard
operation (Ctrl + Alt + Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets
interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral devices, and boots the operating system (if
installed). See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST.
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating a
fatal system error requiring immediate attention. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," for
troubleshooting information.)
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and
test. Depending on the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to
complete the memory test.
NOTE: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen with the
NEC logo screen. You can always change the NEC logo screen to the
POST screen by pressing Esc. To change the start-up screen, use the
BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4 for details.)
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility
stored in ROM on system board or on an installed option board.
Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup.
For the BIOS SETUP for the server, see Chapter 4. For the BIOS SETUP for the option board,
refer to the manual that comes with the option board.
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off
your system.
3-12 Setting Up Your Server
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM
See Chapter 5 for installing Microsoft Windows 2003/2000.
To install the other operating system listed above, contact your sales agent.
IMPORTANT: Use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup of
your server. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is a support software for
the server. It simplifies the process of installing and configuring your
server. See Chapter 6 for details on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
INSTALLING UTILITIES
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 6 for details.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Set the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the
system.
2.
Select [Tools].
3.
Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4.
Select [System Information Management].
5.
Set a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
6.
Select [Save].
Chapter 4
Configuring Your Server
Configuration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration. You can configure
your system, as well as option boards you may add to your system, using the BIOS SETUP Utility.
Several unique system parameters are configured using the BIOS SETUP, which is stored in the
system FLASH memory.
If your system has been factory configured, the BIOS SETUP Utility do not need to be run unless
you want to change the password or security features, add certain types of option boards or devices,
or upgrade your system board.
This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters that are set by
jumpers on the system board. However, these parameters do not usually require change.
SYSTEM BIOS (SETUP)
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is
pre-installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run.
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best
conditions. Thus, you don't need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might
wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below.
IMPORTANT:
„
The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only.
„
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is
provided with two levels of password: Administrator and User.
With the Administrator password, you can view and change all
system parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password,
system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
„
Do not set any password before installing the OS.
„
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog
boxes appear on your SETUP utility, thus, may differ from
descriptions in this manual. If you find anything unclear, see the
online help or ask your sales agent.
4-2 Configuring Your Server
Starting SETUP Utility
A few seconds after powering on, the following message appears at bottom left on the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears.
Enter the password.
Enter CURRENT password:[
]
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three
consecutive times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password:
Administrator and User. With the Administrator password, you can
view and change all system parameters. With the User password,
system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
Configuring Your Server
4-3
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at
the bottom of the screen.)
Indicates the current menu.
Online
help
window
Indicates
there are
submenus.
Explanation
of key
functions
Setup item
menu
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu
Cursor (↑, ↓):
Cursor (←, →):
– and +:
Enter
Esc
F1:
F9:
F10:
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently
selected.
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, Server, Boot, or Exit menu.
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a
submenu option (an option preceded by "³") is selected, these
keys are disabled.
Press Enter to select (determine) parameters.
Displays the previous screen.
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help
screen for SETUP operations appears. Press Esc to return to the
previous screen.
Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the
factory set parameter.
Sets the parameter back to the one stored by the server before the
SETUP utility was started.
4-4 Configuring Your Server
Menu and Parameter Descriptions
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:
„
Main
„
Advanced
„
Security
„
Server
„
Boot
„
Exit
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes
available functions and parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.
Main
Option
AMI BIOS
Parameter
N/A
Processor
N/A
System Memory Size
N/A
Server Board MCH
Stepping
System Time
System Date
Language
N/A
HH:MM:SS
DAY MM/DD/YYYY
French
German
Spanish
Italian
[English]
Description
Your Setting
Display only. Displays the BIOS
version and build date.
Display only. Displays processor
information. For details, see
Processor Configuration
submenu in the Advanced menu.
Display only. Displays the
system memory size installed in
your server.
Displays revision of the chipset
installed on the mother board.
Sets the system time.
Sets the system date.
Selects which language BIOS
displays.
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-5
Advanced
Option
Parameter
Processor Configuration N/A
Advanced Chipset
Control
IDE Configuration
N/A
N/A
Floppy Configuration
N/A
Super I/O Configuration
N/A
USB Configuration
N/A
PCI Configuration
N/A
Memory Configuration
N/A
Description
Your Setting
Displays the Processor
Configuration submenu.
Displays the Advanced Chipset
Control submenu.
Displays the IDE Configuration
submenu.
Displays the Floppy Configuration
submenu.
Displays the Super I/O Configuration
submenu.
Displays the USB Configuration
submenu.
Displays the PCI Configuration
submenu.
Displays the Memory Configuration
submenu.
[
]: Factory-set
Processor Configuration submenu
Option
Manufacturer
Parameter
N/A
Brand String
N/A
Frequency
N/A
FSB Speed
N/A
CPU 1/CPU2
CPUID
CPU 1/CPU2
Cache L1/Cache L2
N/A
Max CPUID Value Limit
[Disabled]
Enabled
Execute Disable Bit
[Disabled]
Enabled
Hyper-Threading
Technology
Disabled
[Enabled]
Auto
[Disabled]
Intel Speed Step
Tech.
N/A
Description
Your Setting
Display only. Displays the Processor
manufacturer name.
Display only. Displays the processor
brand ID.
Display only. Displays the installed
processor speed.
Display only. Displays the front side
bus (FSB) speed of the processor
installed in your system.
Display only. Displays the processor
ID.
Display only. Displays the L1 or L2
cache size of the installed
processor(s).
Selects [Enabled] if your operating
system cannot support processors
with extended CPUID feature.
When disabled, XD feature flag is
set to "0".
This menu is displayed only when
the processor Nocona E0
step/Irwindale is installed.
Disable or enable the HyperThreading Technology.
Selects [Auto] to allow the OS to
reduce power consumption.
[
]: Factory-set
4-6 Configuring Your Server
Advanced Chipset submenu
Option
Wake On LAN
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Wake On PME
[Disabled]
Enabled
Wake On Ring
[Disabled]
Enabled
Wake On RTC
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Your Setting
Specify whether the remote poweron function through embedded NIC
or PCI devices in PCI slots 3 to 5 is
enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the remote poweron function through PCI devices in
slots 1 and 2 is enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the remote poweron function through a serial port is
enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the remote poweron function by using RTC alarm
feature is enabled or disabled.
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-7
IDE Configuration submenu
Option
Onboard P-ATA
Channels
Onboard S-ATA
Channels
Configure S-ATA as
RAID
S-ATA Ports Definition
Parameter
Disabled
[Primary]
Secondary
Both
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Enabled
[A1-Master/A2-Slave]
A1-Slave/A2-Master
Mixed P-ATA/S-ATA
N/A
Primary IDE Master
Primary IDE Slave
Secondary IDE Master
Secondary IDE Slave
Third IDE Master
Third IDE Slave
Fourth IDE Master
Fourth IDE Slave
N/A
Hard Disk Write Protect
[Disabled]
Enabled
IDE Detect Time Out
(Sec)
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
[35]
[Host & Device]
Host
Device
ATA(PI) 80Pin Cable
Detection
Description
Disables or configures the PATA
channels to primary, secondary,
or both.
Your Setting
Disables or enables the onboard
SATA controller.
Selects the SATA function as and
IDE controller or RAID controller.
Defines SATA port to IDE
channel. "A1" indicates the left
side SATA connection.
Displays the " Mixed P-ATA/SATA" submenu. The " Mixed PATA/S-ATA" submenu defines
the priority between the onboard
PATA and SATA channels. See
the online help displayed on the
"Mixed P-ATA/S-ATA" submenu
for details.
BIOS detects the IDE devices at
power-on and displays the
current status of the detected
IDE devices. Select each menu
to display the submenu. In the
submenu, you can configure the
IDE devices such as a device
type, PIO mode, DMA mode,
S.M.A.R.T. feature, data transfer
rate and so on.
Disables or enables hard disk
drives write protection through
BIOS.
Select the time out value for
detecting ATA/ATAPI devices.
This option is used to detect an
older IDE device with longer spin
up times.
Uses a mechanical 80-pin
interface cable to detect the host
and/or device(s).
[
]: Factory-set
4-8 Configuring Your Server
Floppy Configuration submenu
Option
Floppy A
Onboard Floppy
Controller
Parameter
Disabled
720KB 3.5
[1.44 MB 3.5]
2.88MB 3.5
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Set the settings of floppy disk
drive A (standard configuration).
Your Setting
Disables or enables the onboard
floppy drive controller.
[
]: Factory-set
Super I/O Configuration submenu
Option
Serial Port A Address
Serial Port B Address
Parameter
Disabled
[3F8/IRQ4]
2F8/IRQ3
3E8/IRQ4
2E8/IRQ3
Disabled
3F8/IRQ4
[2F8/IRQ3]
3E8/IRQ4
2E8/IRQ3
Description
Disables or selects the I/O port
address and interrupt for serial
port A.
Your Setting
Disables or selects the I/O port
address and interrupt for serial
port B.
[
]: Factory-set
USB Configuration submenu
Option
USB Devices Enabled
USB Function
Legacy USB Support
Port 64/60 Emulation
USB 2.0 Controller
USB 2.0 Controller
Mode
USB Mass Storage
Device Configuration
Parameter
–
Description
Your Setting
Display only. Displays a list of
USB devices detected by BIOS.
If disabled, the USB ports do not
Disabled
accept the USB device class 3
[Enabled]
(HID: Human Interface Device).
Disabled
Selects whether the USB
Keyboard Only
keyboard is made available in
[Auto]
OS which does not support USB
Keyboard and Mouse formally.
[Disabled]
Enables I/O port 60h/64h
Enabled
emulation for using the USB
keyboard with the non-USB
aware operating systems.
Enables or disables the USB 2.0
[Enabled]
controller.
Disabled
FullSpeed
Selects the transfer speed on
[HiSpeed]
USB 2.0.
N/A
Displays the USB Mass Device
Configuration submenu.
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-9
USB Mass Storage Device Configuration submenu
Option
USB Mass Storage
Reset Delay
Device #1
Emulation Type
Parameter
10 Sec
[20 Sec]
30 Sec
40 Sec
Device
[Auto]
Floppy
Forced FDD
Hard Disk
CDROM
Description
Your Setting
Number of seconds POST waits
for the USB mass storage device
after start unit command.
Display only. Displays the USB
mass storage device detected by
BIOS.
If Auto, USB devices less than
530MB will be emulated as
Floppy and remaining as hard
drive. Forced FDD option can be
used to force a HDD formatted
drive to boot as FDD (Ex. ZIP
drive).
[
]: Factory-set
PCI Configuration submenu
Option
Onboard Video
Dual Monitor Video
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Enabled
Onboard NIC 1
(10/100/1000)
Onboard NIC 1
(10/100/1000) ROM
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Slot 1 Option ROM
Slot 2 Option ROM
Slot 3 Option ROM
Slot 4 Option ROM
Slot 5 Option ROM
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Your Setting
Enables or disables the onboard
video controller.
Select which graphics controller
to use in as the primary boot
device. Enabled selects the
onboard device.
Enables or disables the onboard
network interface controller.
Enables or disables the option
ROM scan for the onboard
network interface controller.
Initializes device expansion
ROM.
[
]: Factory-set
4-10 Configuring Your Server
Memory Configuration submenu
Option
DIMM 1A/1B/2A/2B
Parameter
Normal
Not installed
Disabled
Extended Memory Test
1MB
[1KB]
Every location
Disabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
Memory Remap Feature Disabled
[Enabled]
Memory Retest
Memory Sparing
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Your Setting
Displays the current status of the
memory bank. Disabled
indicates that a DIMM in the
bank has failed and the entire
bank has been disabled.
"1MB" indicates that the memory
test is done in the unit of 1MB.
"1KB" indicates that the memory
test is done in the unit of 1KB.
"Every location" tests every
memory location. "Disabled"
indicates that only memory
initialization is done.
Causes BIOS to retest all
memory on the next boot.
If enabled, BIOS allows the
remapping of overlapped PCI
memory above the total physical
memory.
Enables or disables the spare
memory feature.
[
]: Factory-set
Boot
Option
Boot Settings
Configuration
Boot Device Priority
Parameter
N/A
Hard Disk Drives
N/A
Removable Drives
N/A
CD/DVD Drives
N/A
N/A
Description
Your Setting
Displays Boot Settings
Configuration submenu.
Displays the Boot Device Priority
submenu.
Displays the Hard Disk Drives
submenu. In the submenu,
specify the 1st drive from the
option.
Displays the Removable Drives
submenu. In the submenu,
specify the 1st drive from the
option.
Displays the CD/DVD Drives
submenu. In the submenu,
specify the 1st drive from the
option.
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-11
Boot Settings Configuration submenu
Option
Quick Boot
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
Quiet Boot
Disabled
[Enabled]
Bootup Num-Lock
[Off]
On
Disabled
Enabled
[Auto]
Disabled
[Enabled]
PS/2 Mouse Support
Post Error Pause
Hit 'F2' Message Display Disabled
[Enabled]
Scan User Flash Area
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Your Setting
This option allows BIOS to skip
several tests during the POST
sequence. This will decrease the
time required for booting the
system.
If enabled, the BIOS will display
the NEC logo during POST.
Press Esc to switch to the POST
execution screen.
Sets power on Numlock state.
Specify whether BIOS supports
for PS/2 mouse.
Indicates whether POST is
aborted once at the end of POST
if an error occurs during the
execution of POST.
Displays "Press F2 to run Setup"
message in POST.
This option allows BIOS to scan
the flash ROM for user area.
[
]: Factory-set
Boot Device Priority submenu
The Boot Device Priority submenu specifies the boot sequence from the available drives specified
in the Hard Disk Drives, Removable Drives, and CD/DVD Drives submenus, the onboard network
interface controller (for PXE boot), and the EFI boot function.
The factory-default boot order is listed below.
1. CD-ROM drive
2. Floppy disk drive
3. Hard disk drive
4. Network interface controller
5. EFI
The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting.
the server starts the software.
Finding the boot software,
The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the ↑, ↓, +, and - keys. Move the cursor
to the desired device with the ↑ or ↓ key and change the priority with the + or - key.
IMPORTANT: To boot NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, set the priority of
the devices listed above.
4-12 Configuring Your Server
Security
IMPORTANT: Set the passwords only after OS is installed.
Option
Administrator
Password Is
Parameter
Installed
Not Installed
User Password Is
Installed
Not Installed
Set Administrator
Password
Up to seven
alphanumerics
Set User
Password
Up to seven
alphanumerics
User Access Level
No Access
View Only
Limited
[Full Access]
Clear User
Password
Fixed disk boot
sector protect
Press Enter
Password on boot
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Status only, user cannot modify.
Once set, this can be disabled by
setting it to a null string, or by clearing
password jumper on system board
(see Configuring Mother Board
Jumpers in this Chapter).
Status only, user cannot modify.
Once set, this can be disabled by
setting it to a null string, or by clearing
password jumper on system board
(see Configuring Mother Board
Jumpers in this Chapter).
When the Enter key is pressed, the
user is prompted for a password;
press Esc key to abort. Once set, this
can be disabled by setting it to a null
string, or by clearing password jumper
on system board (refer to Configuring
Mother Board Jumpers in this
chapter). Set password to null to clear.
Administrator password controls
access to the setup utility.
When Enter is pressed, the user is
prompted for a password; press Esc
to abort. Once set, this can be
disabled by setting it to a null string, or
by clearing password jumper on
system board (refer to Configuring
Mother Board Jumpers in this
chapter). Set password to null to clear.
"No Access" prevents user access to
the SETUP utility.
"View Only" allows access to the
SETUP utility but no parameters are
changeable.
"Limited" allows only limited fields to
be changed.
Running this menu immediately clears
the user password.
Will write protect the boot sector of the
hard drive to prevent viruses from
corrupting the drive under DOS if set
to write protect.
Disables or enables password entry
on boot.
Your Setting
Configuring Your Server
Option
Secure Mode
Timer
Security Hot Key
CTRL-ALT-
Parameter
[ 1 Minute]
2 Minutes
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
20 Minutes
60 Minutes
120 Minutes
[L]
Z
Secure Mode Boot
[Disabled]
Enabled
Front Panel Switch
Inhibit
[Disabled]
Enabled
NMI Control
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Set the period from no input from the
keyboard or mouse to the point at
which the system enters into the
secure mode.
4-13
Your Setting
Specify the hot key to invoke secure
mode features. Pressing the assigned
key along with Ctrl and Alt invoke
secure mode. This option is enabled
when User Password is set.
Specify whether the system boots in
secure mode. This option is enabled
when User Password is set.
The keyboard will remain locked until
a password is entered.
Enables or disables the POWER
switch. If "Enabled" is selected,
power-off with the POWER switch
becomes unavailable after OS bootup. (Forced shut down also becomes
unavailable. Forced shut down is a
feature to shut down by pressing the
POWER switch for at least four
seconds.)
Enables or disables the DUMP switch
on the front panel.
[
]: Factory-set
4-14 Configuring Your Server
Server
Option
System
Management
Serial Console
Features
Event Log
Configuration
Assert NMI on
PERR
Assert NMI on
SERR
Resume on AC
Power Loss
FRB-2 Policy
Late POST
Timeout
Hard Disk OS
Boot Timeout
PXE OS Boot
Timeout
Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Stays Off]
Power On
[Retry on Next
Boot]
Disable FRB2
Timer
[Disabled]
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
[Disabled]
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
[Disabled]
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
Description
System Management submenu is
displayed.
Serial Console Features submenu is
displayed.
Event Log Configuration submenu is
displayed.
Indicates whether PCI PERR is
supported or not.
Indicates whether PCI SERR is
supported or not.
Indicates the AC LINK function. Shows
the state of the power of the server.
Selects action if the boot processor will
be disabled.
Selects time limit for searching add-in
card. The system will be reset on
timeout.
Selects time limit for booting an
operating system installed in the hard
disk drive. The action taken on timeout
is determined by the Fault Resilient Boot
Timer policy option.
Selects time limit for booting an
operating system using PXE boot. The
action taken on timeout is determined by
the OS Watchdog Timer policy option.
Your Setting
Configuring Your Server
Option
OS Watchdog
Timer Policy
Parameter
Always Reset
[Retry 3 Times]
Platform Event
Filtering
Temperature
Sensor
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Enabled
Post Error Pause
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
This option controls the policy upon PXE
boot timeout.
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the system
is reset after the occurrence of timeout
and OS boot is retried up to three times.
The failure in the third boot causes the
system reboot.
If [Always Reset] is selected, the system
is reset after the occurrence of timeout
and OS boot is retried repeatedly.
Disables or enables triggers for system
sensor events.
Indicates whether the temperature
sensor monitoring function is enabled or
disabled.
Indicates whether POST is aborted once
at the end of POST if an error occurs
during the execution of POST.
4-15
Your Setting
[
IMPORTANT: To power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible
Power Supply), select [Server] - [Resume on AC Power Loss] - [Power
On].
]: Factory-set
4-16 Configuring Your Server
System Management Submenu
Option
Server Board Part
Number
Server Board
Serial Number
NIC1 Mac Address
Parameter
N/A
System Part
Number
System Serial
Number
Chassis Part
Number
Chassis Serial
Number
BIOS Version
N/A
BMC Device ID
N/A
BMC Firmware
Revision
BMC Device
Revision
PIA Revision
N/A
N/A
SDR Revision
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Description
Display only. Displays the mother
board part number.
Display only. Displays the mother
board serial number.
Display only. Displays the MAC
Address for onboard network interface
controller.
Display only. Displays the system part
number.
Display only. Displays the System
serial number.
Display only. Displays the chassis part
number.
Display only. Displays the chassis
serial number.
Display only. Displays the BIOS build
version.
Display only. Displays the BMC device
ID.
Display only. Displays the revision for
BMC firmware.
Display only. Displays the revision for
BMC device.
Display only. Displays the revision for
platform information area.
Display only. Displays the revision for
sensor data record area.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-17
Console Redirection Submenu
Option
BIOS Redirection
Port
Baud Rate
Flow Control
Terminal Type
ACPI Redirection
Port
Parameter
[Disabled]
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
9600
[19.2K]
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
No Flow Control
[CTS/RTS]
Xon/Xoff
CTS/RTS+CD
PC ANSI
[VT100+]
VT-UTF8
[Disabled]
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Description
Specify the address/interrupt of the
serial port to which a remote console
is connected.
Your Setting
Specify the baud rate used for the
interface with successive remote
consoles.
Specify the flow control method.
Specify the type of remote console.
Specify the serial port to which an
ACPI console is connected.
[
]: Factory-set
Event Log Configuration submenu
Option
Clear All Event Logs
BIOS Event Logging
Critical Event Logging
ECC Error Logging
PCI Error Logging
FSB Error Logging
Hublink Error Logging
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Your Setting
Press Enter and select "Enable"
to initialize the system event log.
Select to allow logging of BIOS
events.
Select to allow logging of the
critical system errors. The critical
system errors are fatal to system
operations such as PERR,
SERR, ECC.
Select to allow logging of ECC
error events.
Select to allow logging of PCI
error events.
Select to allow logging of frontside bus error events.
Select to allow logging of hublink
error events.
[
]: Factory-set
4-18 Configuring Your Server
Exit
The options on the menu are described below.
Save Changes and Exit
Exit after writing all modified BIOS SETUP item values to CMOS.
Discard Changes and Exit
Exit leaving CMOS unmodified. User is prompted if any of the setup fields ware modified.
Discard Changes
Read the previous values of the all BIOS Setup items from CMOS.
Load Setup Defaults
Load default values for all BIOS Setup items.
IMPORTANT: This option sets [Configure S-ATA as RAID] in the
[IDE Configuration] submenu of the [Advanced] menu to [Disabled]. If
the SATA hard disk drives are installed in your server and the onboard
SATA RAID feature is used, change the parameter of the [Configure SATA as RAID] from [Disabled] to [Enabled] before exiting BIOS
SETUP utility.
Load Custom Defaults
Load custom defaults.
Save Custom Defaults
Save the current settings as custom defaults.
Configuring Your Server
4-19
CONFIGURING MOTHER BOARD JUMPERS
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the
server against access from unauthorized users. When you forget the passwords, however, you may
want clear them. The following describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the
following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.
IMPORTANT: Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set
configuration data.
To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the mother board of the server.
The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.
IMPORTANT: Do not change any other switch settings. Any
change may cause the server to fail or malfunction.
: Strap
N.A.
Preserves Enables
the contents password
of CMOS* protection*
N.A.
N.A.
Clears
CMOS
Disables the
password
N.A.
* Factory-set
4-20 Configuring Your Server
The following describe the clearing procedure.
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other
than described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an
electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server.
1.
Power off the server and unplug the power cord.
2.
Remove the left side cover from the server (see Chapter 9).
3.
Change the desired jumper switch setting.
IMPORTANT:
4.
„
Use the clip over jumper pins on the mother board.
„
Do not lose the clip.
Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.
During POST, the following code and message are displayed on the screen.
5120 CMOS cleared by jumper
or
5121 Password cleared by jumper
5.
Power off the server upon completion of POST.
6.
Restore the jumper switch setting and power on the server for reconfiguration.
Configuring Your Server
4-21
RAID CONFIGURATION UTILITY
Your server includes the serial ATA RAID controller by supporting the RAID levels 0 and 1. The
Array Configuration Utility (ACU) that is an embedded BIOS utility is used to create, configure,
and manage arrays.
NOTES:
„
You can also configure the SATA RAID drive by using NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER. Refer to Chapter 6 for detail.
„
To configure the RAID drive with the SCSI or IDE hard disk drives,
purchase the optional RAID controller board and hard disk drives.
Installing the Hard Disk Drives
Install the two serial ATA hard disk drives to your server. Refer to Chapter 9 for detail.
IMPORTANT: Use hard disks of the same capacity and revolution.
Activating the SATA RAID Feature
To run the Array Configuration Utility (ACU), run the BIOS setup utility and change the [Configure
S-ATA as RAID] option in the [IDE Configuration] submenu of the [Advanced] menu to "Enabled".
Refer to "System BIOS (BIOS SETUP Utility)" described earlier in this chapter for detail.
4-22 Configuring Your Server
Running the Array Configuration Utility (ACU)
To run ARC, press Ctrl + A when prompted by the following message during the system startup:
Press <Ctrl><A> for Adaptec RAID Configuration Utility
The ARC menu appears, presenting these options:
„
Array Configuration Utility (ACU)
„
Disk utilities
To select an option from this menu, browse with the arrow keys and then press Enter. In some
cases, selecting an option displays another menu. To return to the previous menu at any time, press
Esc.
Configuring Your Server
4-23
Using the Array Configuration Utility
The Array Configuration Utility (ACU) enables you to create, manage, and delete arrays from the
controller’s BIOS, and initialize drives.
Managing Arrays
Use the Manage Arrays option to view array properties and members, and delete arrays. The
following sections describe these operations in greater detail.
Viewing Array Properties
To view the properties of an existing array:
1.
At the BIOS prompt, press Ctrl + A.
2.
From the ACU menu, Array Configuration Utility.
3.
From the main menu, select Manage Arrays.
4.
From the List of Arrays dialog box, select the array you want to view and press Enter.
The Array Properties dialog box appears, showing detailed information on the array. The
physical disks associated with the array are displayed here.
5.
Press Esc to return to the previous menu.
4-24 Configuring Your Server
Deleting Arrays
IMPORTANT: Back up the data on an array before you delete it.
Otherwise, all data on the array is lost. Deleted arrays cannot be
restored.
To delete an existing array:
1.
Turn on your server and press Ctrl + A when prompted to access the ACU.
2.
From the ACU menu, Array Configuration Utility.
3.
From the main menu, select Manage Arrays.
4.
Select the array you wish to delete and press Delete.
5.
In the Array Properties dialog box, select Delete and press Enter.
The following prompt is displayed:
Warning!! Deleting the array will render array unusable. Do you want to delete
the array?(Yes/No):
RAID 1 only—the following prompt is also displayed:
Deleting the partition will result in data loss! Do you also want to delete the
partition? (Yes/No):
6.
Press Y to delete the array or partition or N to return to the previous menu.
7.
Press Esc to return to the previous menu.
Configuring Your Server
4-25
Creating Arrays
Before creating arrays, make sure the disks for the array are connected and installed in your system.
Note that disks with no usable space, or disks that are uninitialized are shown in gray and cannot be
used. See Initializing Disk Drives described later.
To create an array:
1.
Turn on your server and press Ctrl + A when prompted to access the ACU.
2.
From the ACU menu, Array Configuration Utility.
3.
From the main menu, select Create Array.
4.
Select the disks for the new array and press Insert. To deselect any disk, highlight the
disk and press Delete.
5.
Press Enter when both disks for the new array are selected.
The Array Properties menu displays.
4-26 Configuring Your Server
Assigning Array Properties
NOTE: Once the array is created and its properties are assigned, you
cannot change the array properties using the ACU. Instead, use Adaptec
Storage Manager - Browser Edition. (See Chapter 6 for details.)
To assign properties to the new array:
1.
In the Array Properties menu, select an array type and press Enter. Note that only the
available array types, RAID0 and RAID1, are displayed. Each of these types requires two
drives.
2.
Type in an optional label for the array and press Enter.
Configuring Your Server
3.
4-27
For RAID0, select the desired stripe size. Available stripe sizes are 16, 32, and 64 KB
(default).
NOTE: NEC recommends that you do not change the default.
4.
Create RAID via allows you to select between the different creation methods for RAID0
and RAID1. The following table gives examples of when each is appropriate.
RAID level
RAID0
RAID0
Create via
No Init
Migrate*
RAID1
Build*
RAID
Clear
RAID1
Quick Init
When appropriate
Creating a RAID0 on new drives.
Creating a RAID0 from on new drive and one drive with
data you wish to preserve.
Any time you wish to create RAID1, but especially if you
have data on one drive that you wish to preserve.
Creating a RAID1 on new drives, or when you want to
ensure that the array contains no data after creation.
Fastest way to create a RAID1. Appropriate when using
new drives.
4-28 Configuring Your Server
NOTES:
„
Before adding a new drive to an array, back up any data contained
on the new drive. Otherwise, all data will be lost.
„
If you stop the Build or Clear process on a RAID1 from ACU, you
can only restart it from Adaptec Storage Manager - Browser Edition.
(See Chapter 6 for details.)
„
A RAID1 created using the Quick Init option may return some data
miscompares if you later run a consistency check. This is normal
and is not a cause for concern.
„
The ACU allows you to use drives of different sizes in a RAID1.
During a build operation however, only the smaller drive can be
selected as the source or first drive.
„
When migrating from single volume to RAID0, migrating from a
larger drive to a smaller drive is allowed. However the destination
drive must be at least half the capacity of the source drive.
„
Adaptec does not recommend that you migrate or build an array on
Windows dynamic disks (volumes), as it will result in data loss.
5.
Select a source drive from the Select Source Drive list box and press Enter.
6.
When you are finished, press Done.
Configuring Your Server
4-29
Initializing Disk Drives
If an installed disk does not appear in the disk selection list for creating a new array or if it appears
grayed out, you may have to initialize it before you can use it as part of an array. Drives attached to
the controller must be initialized before they can be used in an array.
IMPORTANT: Initializing a disk overwrites the partition table on the
disk and makes any data on the disk inaccessible. If the drive is used in
an array, you may not be able to use the array again. Do not initialize a
disk that is part of a boot array. To determine which disks are associated
with a particular array, see Viewing Array Properties described earlier
in this section.
To initialize drives:
1.
Turn on your server and press Ctrl + A when prompted to access the ACU.
2.
From the ACU menu, Array Configuration Utility.
3.
Select Initialize Drives.
4.
Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the disk you wish to initialize and press
Insert.
5.
Repeat Step 3 so that both drives to be initialized are selected.
6.
Press Enter.
7.
Read the warning message and ensure that you have selected the correct disk drives to
initialize. Type Y to continue.
4-30 Configuring Your Server
Using the Disk Utilities
The Disk Utilities enable you to format or verify the media of your Serial ATA hard disks.
To access the disk utilities:
1.
Turn on your server and press Ctrl + A when prompted to access the ACU.
2.
From the ACU menu, select Disk Utilities.
3.
Select the desired disk and press Enter.
Configuring Your Server
4-31
You are offered the following options:
„
Format Disk—Simulates a low-level format of the hard drive by writing zeros to the
entire disk. Serial ATA drives are low-level formatted at the factory and do not need to be
low-level formatted again.
IMPORTANT: Formatting destroys all data on the drive. Be sure to
back up your data before performing this operation.
„
Verify Disk Media—Scans the media of a disk drive for defects.
ADD-IN CARD'S BIOS
Refer to the documentation coming with the optional add-in card for details.
When the server has multiple optional PCI boards installed, the server first displays the start-up
message of the BIOS SETUP Utility of the mother board. It then displays the utility start-up
message for optional PCI boards one by one. The start-up message appears for the optional PCI
board in the PCI #1 slot first, then PCI #2, PCI #3, PCI #4, and finally PCI #5. The message
displayed may vary depending on the optional PCI board. Refer to the manual that comes with the
optional PCI board for details.
4-32 Configuring Your Server
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 5
Installing the Operating System with Express
Setup
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following
operating systems to the server.
„
Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 Standard Edition
„
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section, contact your service
representative.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the
system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP." See
Chapter 4 for detail.
This chapter also includes information on configuring the HostRAID™ drive used with the onboard
serial ATA interface. Refer to the end of this chapter for detail.
5-2 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
About Express Setup
"Express Setup" contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM is intended for initial setup
of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through the process by
detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and
configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the
disk, and installs the desired operating system.
IMPORTANT: Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the
server system. Therefore, it clears the contents of the hard disk.
For Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000, Express Setup automatically configures
your server and installs the operating system. After a few tasks are completed, all that remains to
be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM,
input a product ID number, and acknowledge the license agreement.
For the other operating systems, Express Setup initializes the target disk(s), creates the maintenance
partition, and installs the various maintenance utilities from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CDROM to lead your server to ready-to-install for the desired operating system.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-3
Express Setup uses "Configuration Diskette". The Configuration Diskette is a floppy disk that
includes the configuration information for the server setup used in the automatic installation mode.
Express Setup will perform all the process of the setup using the information in the floppy disk.
During this procedure, you do not have to be in front of the Express server to confirm the state of
the setup. Also, using the same Configuration Diskette used before allows you to re-setup your
server with the same condition as before.
Express Setup includes two types of installation method.
„
Quick start
Quick start uses the Configuration Diskette that the configuration parameters for server
setup are pre-loaded before starting the Express Setup. The configuration parameters are
loaded by using the Configuration Diskette Creator (see Chapter 6).
„
Normal start
Normal start is to create the Configuration Diskette after starting the Express Setup.
NOTES:
„
Use the blank disk in the accessory box to create Configuration
Diskette.
„
You can create Configuration Diskette in advance using
"Configuration Diskette Creator" included in NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
If you create Configuration Diskette in advance, you can
abbreviate the items that is necessary to input or select during
Express Setup. (You can also create or modify the setup
information restored in Configuration Diskette during Express
Setup.) If you have a computer other than your servers that is
running with Windows 95/98/Me/XP, Windows NT 3.51 or later,
or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, we recommend you to
edit setup information from the computer in advance using
Configuration Diskette Creator.
For more information on how to create Configuration Diskette using
Configuration Diskette Creator, see Chapter 6.
5-4 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® Server 2003 in the server.
Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation.
NOTES:
„
Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server
x64 Editions.
If you want to install it, see Appendix D.
„
If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup,
see Appendix E.
Installation Notice
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation
in order to install Windows Server 2003 correctly.
Supported OS on this model
The server supports the following edition:
„ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows
Server 2003")
On installing other OS, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install optional mass storage driver, see "Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of
"Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file.
BIOS Specification
Before installing Windows Server 2003, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct.
See Chapter 4 to specify them.
NEC ESMPRO Agent
On Windows Server 2003 systems, the ESMPRO Agent needs the necras.sys driver. To install the
necras.sys, run the System update from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
„
Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
„
– N8103-65F SCSI Controller
– N8103-75F SCSI Controller
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller
– N8103-78F Disk Array Controller (SATA)
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)
– N8103-89 Disk Array Controller (SATA)
– SATA HostRAID (Onboard Adaptec HostRAID controller)
Other optional boards
– N8103-56F SCSI Controller
5-5
5-6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Windows Server 2003
Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system.
issue:
However, note the following
IMPORTANT:
„
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding
the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe
(BIOS and optional board specification)
„
The document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached
to the other software package which is sold separately from NEC,
but refer to this document when you install Windows Server 2003
on this model.
„
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems"
described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as
"Specifying Memory Dump".
Installing on the Mirrored Volume
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk
Management", invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk,
and valid the mirroring again after the installation has completed.
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer
Management".
Connecting MO Device
If you operate installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected, the installation may not
be completed normally. In such case, detach MO device and then re-install the system from the
beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,
such as DAT.
Connecting Hard Disk Drive
Connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS.
If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Re-installing the operation system
when multiple logical drives exist" (Appendix D).
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-7
Creating Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following
formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
+ Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 2900MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify
4095MB for the paging file size.
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the
above formula as follows:
2900MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) + Application Size
= 4192MB + Application Size
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to
Dynamic Disk kept remained.
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix D to re-install the system.
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "EISA")
In disk area, an area displayed as "EISA" may exist. This area is maintenance partition for saving
configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.
5-8 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
The Flow of Setup
This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.
: Process that proceeds automatically
: Process that needs to input or select
Do you want to proceed the setup using the setup parameter file?
No
Yes
Read notes and restrictions
Confirmed
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive
Confirmed
New File
Confirmed
(Select Setup Parameter File)
Existing File
Check Setup Parameter File
Correct
Skipped
Select whether or not to confirm/modify the setting
Confirmed
Disk Array Configuration Screen
Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities
Operating System Installation Menu
Create the OS partition after the reboot
Confirm Setup File
Create New File
Select OS to install
In case [Skip] is selected
Confirm the specification and input the value
Remove the Floppy Disk and CD-ROM
from the Drive
Insert Windows CD-ROM
Agree Software License Agreement
Install OS Automatically
↓
Log on Automatically
After restarting the computer, the
installation is completed.
Copying NEC Modules
↓
Copying Selected Application Modules
No Floppy Disk
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-9
Installing the Windows Server 2003
Express Setup proceeds the setup by specifying the necessary information on the wizard. You can
also save the setup information created on the wizard in a floppy disk as a setup file.
NOTE: One floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44MB is necessary
to save the setup information. Please prepare a floppy disk by yourself
before the installation.
Using the same setup file you saved and used before allows you to
omit specifying the setup information on the wizard.
And if you use a floppy disk which is attached to the optional device
such as disk array controller and contains device driver to install
optional mass storage driver while processing the Express Setup, you
have to save the setup information in the setup file. Please prepare one
empty floppy disk for setup file in this case, too.
1.
Turn the power of peripheral device on, and then turn on the server.
NOTES:
„ If you operate installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device
connected, the installation may not be completed normally. In such
case, detach MO device and then re-install the system from the
beginning.
„ Connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed
after installing OS.
„ If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to
"Reinstalling the operation system when multiple logical drives
exist" (Appendix D).
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
3.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
4.
Click [Express Setup].
5.
The message, "Do you want to use the parameter file in order to set up the Express Server
or Workstation?", will be displayed.
If you use the setup parameter file, click [Yes] and if you do not use the setup parameter
file, click [No].
6.
"Note" will be displayed. Read the instruction carefully and click [Confirm].
5-10 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
7.
Notes and restrictions are displayed.
Read the messages carefully and click [Confirm].
NOTE: If some operating system has been installed on the hard disk
already, the message which asks if you continue the installation
appears.
If you wish to continue the installation, click [Continue].
8.
If you select "Yes" at step 5, place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the
server.
If not, go on the next step.
NOTE: If you set the floppy disk at this step, do not remove the
floppy disk from the server until the message as removing the floppy
disk appears.
[Using the existing Configuration Disk]
The parameters files in the floppy disk is listed in dialog box.
1) Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup and click [Use].
After the parameters file is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify
the Setup File parameters?" appears.
2) If you want to modify or confirm the parameters file, click [Review]. If not, click
[Skip].
Click [Review] → Go on the next step.
Click [Skip] → Go on the step 10.
[Using a blank disk]
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.
The dialog box appears.
2) Input the file name and click [Use].
9.
Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration.
[Configure RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and
then click [OK].
NOTE: Choose RAID0 when you install it in one hard disk.
When the dialog box is closed, the Express setup automatically performs the RAID
configuration, creating Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.
10.
Select the installing Operating system.
Select "Windows" from the menu.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
11.
5-11
Select the Windows family.
Select "Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server
2003 Enterprise Edition" category.
NOTE: If you select "Skip" at step 8, this menu does not appear.
Go on the step 13.
12.
Next, [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary,
and then click [Next].
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen to continue. Modify the
parameters each time if necessary.
IMPORTANT:
„
Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally
required size.
„
If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID
Configuration", the information included in the first partition
(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted and deleted.
The information included in the other partition will be retained.
In the figure below, describes the partition which information will
be deleted when maintenance partition exists.
First Partition
<Maintenance Partition>
Retained
Second
Partition
Deleted
Third
Partition
Retained
Fourth
Partition
Retained
„
You can not re-install the system with the existing partition that is
upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use
Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".
„
If you specify other than 4095MB for the "Installing Partition", it
is necessary to convert to NTFS.
„
If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is
selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows
Server 2003 does not exist (excluding maintenance partition),
Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk to
install Windows Server 2003.
„
You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.
„
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the
specified contents of the former screen and require to go back to
modify the specification.
„
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows
Server 2003 is to be installed appears. The first 55MB area
displayed on the screen is a partition that is used to store the
configuration information or utilities unique of the server. We do
not recommend to delete this area, but if you do not want to
reserve this 55MB area, perform the installation by manual setup.
It is unable to delete this area by Express Setup.
5-12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
NOTES:
13.
„
If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen will
go back to select the OS. [Cancel] exists only in [Basic
Information] screen.
„
If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup
automatically selects default value for the later specification to
continue the installation.
Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to
mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the
installation.
NOTE: You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is
attached to the system.
14.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive according to
the message.
If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file, remove the floppy disk from the
floppy disk drive.
Insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
[Agree Software License Agreement] screen appears.
15.
Read the contents carefully and click [I Agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not
agree, click [I Disagree] or press F3.
IMPORTANT:
„
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and
Windows Server 2003 will not be installed.
„
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install,
the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and
Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specify the
appropriate value.
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-13
Installing and Setting Device Drivers
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any
trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PROSET\WS03XP32
The [Intel(R) PROSet - Install Shield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [Install Shield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9.
Restart the system.
5-14 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click
[Local Area Connection].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.
2.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
The [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box appears.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] window.
2.
Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the
value specified for HUB.
4.
Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-15
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet)
that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This
tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on
how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems"
described later in this chapter.
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-112/103/113), the network driver will be
installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be used.
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-86/111), install the driver stored in NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
In case of utilizing (N8104-86/111)
"CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PRO100\WS03XP32"
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the
section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Click [Network adapters] and Double-Click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.
NOTE: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter.
All other names show the Optional Network Board.
3.
Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard] appears.
4.
Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button and click
[Next].
5.
Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the
[Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
6.
Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [(N810486/111)], specify [CD-ROM driveletter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PRO100\WS03XP32].
Then click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
5-16 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-65F/75)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel]→ [Administrative Tools]
→[Computer Management].
2.
Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.
3.
Click [Update Driver].
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5.
Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Have Disk..].
7.
Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy
disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].
8.
Specify the following driver and click [Next].
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller]
(When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI]
(When N8103-75 board is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-56F/95)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-56F/95), update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-17
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F)
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows 2003, connect the controller
and take the following steps to install the driver:
1.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].
2.
When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a
suitable driver for my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3.
When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert
"Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk
drive, and click [Next].
4.
When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].
5.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection
wizard] dialog box below appears. Click [Complete].
5-18 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini
files"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in
Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension
switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2.
In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3.
Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].
4.
Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, Standard" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, Standard, PAE"
/fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you
can make your system start automatically from the switch you
specified.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-19
Setting for Solving Problems
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely
and as soon as possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the
server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the
memory dump.
„
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you restart the
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1.
Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
2.
Select [Advanced] tab.
3.
Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
5-20 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
IMPORTANT:
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel
Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 1MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2003
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel
Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
4.
5-21
Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Write debugging
information] group box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5.
Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window appears.
6.
Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7.
Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8.
Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value larger than
[Recommended], and click [Set].
IMPORTANT:
9.
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition
Size to be Created" described earlier.
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit
the new memory size.
„
To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, we
recommend you to press dump switch to confirm that the dump
will be collected normally in advance.
Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification.
In such case, follow the message to restart the system.
5-22 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Windows Dr. Watson
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr.
Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below
and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.
1.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
2.
Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.
3.
Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".
NOTE: You can not specify network path. Specify the path on local
computer.
4.
Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with
Windows Debugger.
5.
Check the following check box on the [Option] box.
† Dump Symbol Table
† Dump All Thread Contexts
† Add To Existing Log File
† Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
6.
Click [OK].
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-23
Network Monitor
Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. To utilize
Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so we
recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.
1.
Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].
The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.
4.
Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the component ON and click
[Next].
5.
If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CDROM drive and click [OK].
6.
Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
7.
Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.
8.
Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Installing Maintenance Utilities
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See
Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.
5-24 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Updating the System
Update the system in the situation below:
„
Modified system configuration.
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and
insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update
the System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the
setup process.
Making Backup Copies of System Information
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot the
system.
2.
Select [Tools].
3.
Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4.
Select [System Information Management].
5.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
6.
Select [Save].
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-25
Exceptional Setup
This section explains how to setup with the exceptional way. You usually do not have to do as
follows. If your system has any Mass storage devices, you have to set as follows depending on your
system. The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass storage device.
Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup
If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to
be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.
1.
Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.
2.
If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID system before
running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
3.
Boot the system from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
4.
(a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check "Use Existing Array".
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".
5.
Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to messages displayed on the display.
5-26 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Microsoft Windows 2000
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows® 2000 in the server.
Read instruction in this section before proceeding the installation.
NOTE: If you install Windows 2000 without using Express Setup, see
Appendix D.
Installation Notice
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation
in order to install Windows 2000 correctly.
Supported OS on this model
The server supports the following edition:
„ Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows 2000")
On installing other OS, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install optional mass storage driver, see "Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver" of
"Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6 to create setup inf file.
BIOS Specification
Before installing Windows 2000, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct. On
BIOS specification, there are some items to specify for the new functions provided from Windows
2000 (Plug and Play, support for USB interface and so on). See Chapter 4 to specify them.
NEC ESMPRO Agent
On Windows 2000 systems, the ESMPRO Agent needs the necras.sys driver. To install the
necras.sys, run the System update from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
„
„
Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
– N8103-75F SCSI Controller
– N8103-78F Disk Array Controller (SATA)
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)
– N8103-89 Disk Array Controller
– SATA HostRAID (Onboard Adaptec HostRAID controller)
Other optional boards
– N8103-56F SCSI Controller
– N8103-65F SCSI Controller
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-27
Windows 2000
Express Setup can install Windows 2000 operating system.
However, note the following issue:
IMPORTANT:
„
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding
the optional device and the setup of Express server mainframe
(BIOS and optional board specification)
„
The document for installing Windows 2000 is also attached to the
other software package which is sold separately from NEC, but
refer to this document when you install Windows 2000 on this
model.
„
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems"
described later to specify the settings for trouble recovery such as
"Specifying Memory Dump".
Installing on the Mirrored Volume
If you want to install Windows 2000 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk Management",
invalid the mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk, and valid the
mirroring again after the installation has completed.
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer
Management".
Connecting MO Device
If you operate installing Windows 2000 with MO device connected, the installation may not be
completed normally. In such case, detach MO device and then re-install the system from the
beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,
such as DAT.
Connecting Hard Disk Drive
Connect the hard disk that OS is not going to be installed after installing OS.
If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Re-installing the operation system
when multiple logical drives exist" (Appendix E).
Disk Configuration (Concerning the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")
In disk area, an area displayed as "MAINTE_P" may exist. This area is maintenance partition for
saving configuration information and utilities. Do not delete the area.
5-28 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Creating Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following
formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
+ Application Size
Size necessary to install the system
Paging File Size (Recommended)
Dump file Size
Application Size
= 1000MB
= Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
= Mounted Memory Size + 12MB
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify
4095MB for the paging file size.
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the
above formula as follows:
1000MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) + Application Size
= 2292MB + Application Size
NOTES:
If you want to install using Express Setup, calculate the minimally
required partition size as follows:
„
If you do not apply Windows 2000 Service Pack
The larger value of either one: 'Minimum Partition Size' described
above, or '4095MB'.
„
If you want to apply Windows 2000 Service Pack
The larger value of either one: 'Minimum Partition Size' described
above + 850MB or '4095MB'.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk
You cannot re-install Windows 2000 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to
Dynamic Disk kept remained.
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix D to re-install the system.
5-29
5-30 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
The Flow of Setup
This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup.
: Process that proceeds automatically
: Process that needs to input or select
Do you want to proceed the setup using the setup parameter file?
No
Yes
Read notes and restrictions
Confirmed
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive
Confirmed
New File
Confirmed
(Select Setup Parameter File)
Existing File
Check Setup Parameter File
Correct
Skipped
Select whether or not to confirm/modify the setting
Confirmed
Disk Array Configuration Screen
Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities
Operating System Installation Menu
Create the OS partition after the reboot
Confirm Setup File
Create New File
Select OS to install
In case [Skip] is selected
Confirm the specification and input the value
Remove the Floppy Disk and CD-ROM
from the Drive
Insert Windows CD-ROM
Agree Software License Agreement
Insert SP CD-ROM
(If you selected [Apply] on [Apply Service Pack].)
Install OS Automatically
↓
Log on Automatically
After restarting the computer, the
installation is completed.
Copying NEC Modules
↓
Copying Selected Application Modules
No Floppy Disk
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-31
Installing the Windows 2000
Express Setup proceeds the setup by specifying the necessary information on the wizard. You can
also save the setup information created on the wizard in a floppy disk as a setup file.
NOTE: One floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44MB is necessary
to save the setup information. Please prepare a floppy disk by yourself
before the installation.
Using the same setup file you saved and used before allows you to omit specifying the setup
information on the wizard.
And if you use a floppy disk which is attached to the optional device such as disk array controller
and contains device driver to install optional mass storage driver while processing the Express Setup,
you have to save the setup information in the setup file. Please prepare one empty floppy disk for
setup file in this case, too.
1.
Turn the power of peripheral device on, and then turn on the server.
NOTES:
„
If you operate installing Windows 2000 with MO device connected,
the installation may not be completed normally. In such case,
detach MO device and then re-install the system from the
beginning.
„
Connect the hard disk drive that OS is not going to be installed
after installing OS.
„
If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to
"Reinstalling the operation system when multiple logical drives
exist" (Appendix D).
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
3.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
4.
Click [Express Setup].
5.
The message, "Do you want to use the parameter file in order to set up the Express Server
or Workstation?", will be displayed.
If you use the setup parameter file, click [Yes] and if you do not use the setup parameter
file, click [No].
5-32 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
6.
"Note" will be displayed. Read the instruction carefully and click [Confirm].
7.
Notes and restrictions are displayed.
Read the messages carefully and click [Confirm].
NOTE: If some oparating system has been installed on the hard disk
already, the message which asks if you continue the installation
appears.
If you wish to continue the installation, click [Continue].
8.
If you select "Yes" at step 5, place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the
server.
If not, go on the next step.
NOTE: If you set the floppy disk at this step, do not remove the
floppy disk from the server until the message as removing the floppy
disk appears.
[Using the existing Configuration Disk]
The parameters files in the floppy disk is listed in dialog box.
1) Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup and click [Use].
After the parameters file is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify
the Setup File parameters?" appears.
2) If you want to modify or confirm the parameters file, click [Review]. If not, click
[Skip].
Click [Review] → Go on the next step.
Click [Skip] → Go on the step 10.
[Using a blank disk]
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.
The dialog box appears.
2) Input the file name and click [Use].
9.
Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration.
[Configure RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and
then click [OK].
NOTE: Choose RAID0 when you install it in one hard disk.
When the dialog box is closed, the Express setup automatically performs the RAID
configuration, creating Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
10.
5-33
Select the installing Operating system.
Select "Windows" from the menu.
11.
Select the Windows family.
Select "Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server"
category.
NOTE: If you select "Skip" at step 8, this menu does not appear.
Go on the step 13.
12.
Next, [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary,
and then click [Next].
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] on the screen to continue. Modify the
parameters each time if necessary.
IMPORTANT:
„
Reserve the partition to install the OS more than the minimally
required size.
„
If you select "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID
Configuration", the information included in the first partition
(excluding maintenance partition) will all be formatted and deleted.
The information included in the other partition will be retained.
In the figure below, describes the partition which information will
be deleted when maintenance partition exists.
First Partition
<Maintenance Partition>
Retained
Second
Partition
Deleted
Third
Partition
Retained
Fourth
Partition
Retained
„
You can not re-install the system with the existing partition that is
upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained. Do not select "Use
Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration".
„
If "Create New Partition" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration"
is selected, do not specify the value for the partition more than the
actual area size.
„
If you specify other than 4095MB for the "Installing Partition", it
is necessary to convert to NTFS.
„
If "Use Existing Array" at "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is
selected but the partition other than the one to install Windows
2000 does not exist (excluding maintenance partition), Express
Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk to install
Windows 2000.
5-34 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
IMPORTANT:
„
You can not go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.
„
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the
specified contents of the former screen and require to go back to
modify the specification.
„
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows
2000 is to be installed appears. The first 55MB area displayed on
the screen is a partition that is used to store the configuration
information or utilities unique of the server. We do not recommend
to delete this area, but if you do not want to reserve this 55MB
area, perform the installation by manual setup. It is unable to
delete this area by Express Setup.
NOTES:
13.
„
If you click [Cancel] in [Basic Information] screen, the screen will
go back to select the OS. [Cancel] exists only in [Basic
Information] screen.
„
If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup
automatically selects default value for the later specification to
continue the installation.
Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to
mass storage driver into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to operate the
installation.
NOTE: You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is
attached to the system.
14.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive according to
the message.
If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file, remove the floppy disk from the
floppy disk drive.
Insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
[Agree Software License Agreement] screen appears.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
15.
5-35
Read the contents carefully and click [I Agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not
agree, click [I Disagree] or press F3.
IMPORTANT:
16.
„
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and
Windows 2000 will not be installed.
„
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install,
the window to specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and
Client) Service" pops up on the first logon. Specify the
appropriate value.
If you selected [Yes] on [Apply Service Pack] at Basic Information, follow the procedure
below.
1)
Follow the message to take Windows 2000 CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive.
2)
Follow the message to insert Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or later into the CDROM drive.
Windows 2000 and the specified application will be installed automatically and logon to
the system. Install and configure the device drivers.
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.
5-36 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Installing and Setting Device Drivers
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver. Be sure to
install. Utilizing PROSet enables the following issues:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Specify teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server an environment tolerant on
any trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Start menu, point to [Program], [Accessory] and click [Explorer].
3.
Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PROSET\WIN2K
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9.
Restart the system.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-37
Network Driver
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
Click Start menu and click [Network and Dial-Up Connection].
The [Network and Dial-Up Connection] dialog box appears.
2.
Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
4.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
5.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
6.
Click [OK] on the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary. You can operate the process from
[Network and Dial-up Connection] to display the property dialog box for local area network.
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the
packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or
receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving
Problems" described later in this chapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] window.
The [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box appears. Double-click the
[Intel(R) PROSet Wired] icon.
2.
Put the cursor to the network driver in the list.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
Also specify the other network driver with the same progress above.
5-38 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-112/111/86/103/113), install the driver stored
in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Refer to the re-installation procedure described in Appendix E.
Network Driver for (N8104-86/111)
[CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PRO100\WIN2K]
Network Driver for (N8104-112/103/113)
[CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PRO1000\WIN2K]
Graphics Accelerator Driver
Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically.
The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install manually.
If you want to utilize optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to
the board to install the driver.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
3.
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
<CD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\VIDEO\SETUP.EXE
4.
Follow the message to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to
continue.
5.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, follow the
direction on the screen and restart the system.
USB 2.0 Driver
USB 2.0 Driver is pre-installed.
When restoring the system or re-installing the system, the driver is automatically installed in the
process of updating the system.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-39
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-65F/75)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel]→ [Administrative Tools]
→[Computer Management].
2.
Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.
3.
Click [Update Driver].
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5.
Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Have Disk..].
7.
Insert "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive,
enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].
8.
Specify the following driver and click [Next].
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller]
(When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000]
(When N8103-75 board is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-56F/95)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-56F/95), update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F)
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows 2000, connect the controller
and take the following steps to install the driver:
1.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].
2.
When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a
suitable driver for my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3.
When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert
"Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and
click [Next].
4.
When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].
5.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection
wizard] dialog box below appears. Click [Complete].
5-40 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Available Switch Options for Windows 2000 Boot.ini File
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini File.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 170756
"Available Switch Options for the Windows NT Boot.ini File"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in
Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension
switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Notepad].
2.
On the [File] menu, click [Open...].
3.
In the [Open] dialog box, in the [Look in] drop-down list box, click "%systemroot%"
drive.
4.
In the [Open] dialog box, in the [Files of type] drop-down list box, click "All Files" and in
the [File name] drop-down list box, enter "Boot.ini". And then, click [Open].
The content of Boot.ini file will be displayed.
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT="Windows 2000 Server" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT="Windows 2000 Server, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you
can make your system start automatically from the switch you
specified.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-41
Setting for Solving Problems
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely
and as soon as possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the
server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the
memory dump.
„
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you re-start the
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1.
Point to [Settings] in Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Advanced].
4.
Click [Startup and Recovery].
5.
Enter the location to write the debug information to the text box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive with the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5-42 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
IMPORTANT:
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended. If the mounted memory size is larger
than 2GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that
specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
6.
Click [Performance Options].
7.
Click [Change] on the [Virtual Memory] dialog box.
8.
Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging File Size for Selected Drive] box to the value larger
than [Recommended Size], and click [Specify].
IMPORTANT:
9.
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition
Size to be Created" described earlier.
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit
the new memory size.
„
To prepare for the situation when any trouble occurred, we
recommend you to press dump switch to confirm that the dump
will be collected normally in advance.
Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification.
In such case, follow the message to restart the system.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-43
Windows 2000 Dr. Watson
Windows 2000 Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected,
Dr. Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure
below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.
1.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
2.
Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows 2000] dialog box appears.
3.
Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".
NOTE: You can not specify network path. Specify the path on local
computer.
4.
Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with
Windows Debugger.
5.
Check the following check box on the [Option] box.
† Dump Symbol Table
† Dump All Thread Contexts
† Add To Existing Log File
† Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
6.
Click [OK].
5-44 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Network Monitor
Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble. To utilize
Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so we
recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.
1.
Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Add/Remove Programs].
The [Add/Remove Programs] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.
4.
Check the [Management and Monitoring Tools] check box of the component ON and click
[Next].
5.
If the setup asks to install the disk, insert Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM
drive and click [OK].
6.
Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
7.
Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.
8.
Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Installing Maintenance Utilities
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See
Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-45
Updating the System - Installing Service Pack IMPORTANT: Without applying Service Pack and applying Service
Pack 1, 2, or 3 to this system are not supported. If you install
Windows 2000 CD-ROM which contains ServicePack 4 to your
system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again.
Update the system in the situation below:
„
Modified system configuration.
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and
insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update
the System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the
setup process and apply Service Pack.
Making Backup Copies of System Information
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot the
system.
2.
Select [Tools].
3.
Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4.
Select [System Information Management].
5.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
6.
Select [Save].
5-46 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Exceptional Setup
This section explains how to setup with the exceptional way. You usually do not have to do as
follows. If your system has any Mass storage devices, you have to set as follows depending on your
system. The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass storage device.
Installation of Mass storage device not to be supported by ExpressSetup
If you would like to install or re-install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to
be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.
1.
Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.
2.
If the mass storage device is disk array controller, configure the RAID system before
running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
3.
Boot the system from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
4.
(a) When the dialog of Disk array configuration appears, check "Use Existing Array".
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".
5.
Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to messages displayed on the display.
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-47
HostRAID
The following explains the overview of HostRAID and the setup procedure.
Overview of HostRAID
HostRAID provides RAID feature through the onboard serial ATA interface in your system.
HostRAID consists of the driver that controls disk arrays and "Adaptec Storage Manager™ Browser Edition" (hereinafter referred to as "ASMBE") that is a disk array management utility.
The software products are mandatory for HostRAID to function normally. Be sure to install both
software products. For the driver, refer to the setup procedure explained in this manual. For
ASMBE, refer to the "Adaptec Storage Manager™ - Browser Edition User's Guide."
Overview of the specifications
Hard disk drive:
One hard disk drive for each channel (two hard disk drives
max.)
RAID level:
RAID0 or RAID1
Operating system:
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/
Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server
Configuration Method of disk arrays:
BIOS setup utility, NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and
ASMBE
Features
„
HostRAID enables the BIOS utility to select the disk array/standard SATA for each
channel.
„
Since the JAVA-based management utility ASMBE uses the browser (IE5.5 or later), the
software does not need to be installed into each client PC for management. (The software
must be installed in each server.)
5-48 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
Notes
The following explains general notes on HostRAID:
For notes on the BIOS setup utility, refer to Chapter 4 of this manual. For notes on ASMBE, refer to
Adaptec Storage Manager™ - Browser Edition User's Guide.
NOTE: You may view or print the Adaptec Storage Manager™ Browser Edition User's Guide from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM.
„
Only use the HostRAID drive as a system drive.
„
Only a hard disk drive can be connected to a channel with which HostRAID is enabled
through the BIOS setup utility.
„
To connect a device other than a hard disk drive, disable HostRAID and use it as the
standard SATA.
„
In addition to driver installation, ASMBE installation is mandatory for using HostRAID
functions. For the installation of ASMBE, refer to the "Adaptec Storage Manager™ Browser Edition User's Guide."
„
If you replace a hard disk drive being used with HostRAID, please replace the hard disk
drive after power-off of the system. Be sure to check the PORT number of the hard disk
drive to be replaced in ASMBE in advance.
„
HostRAID does not permit the use of the standby/hibernation mode of ACPI functions.
„
Use ASMBE to maintain HostRAID, but do not use any other utilities.
„
If the following messages are included in the application log or log generated by the
ASMBE, your RAID system operates normally.
– Spare test failed for pool spare (bus=%2, ch=%3, id=%4)
– Test of all spares completed with %1 failures
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
5-49
HostRAID Setup Flow
The flowchart below shows the HostRAID system setup procedure.
Start
Enable the HostRAID
feature and create RAID by
using BIOS setup utility
Refer to Chapter 4*1.
Install driver
(install OS).
See Appendix D or E of
this guide.
Update system.
See this chapter.
Install ASMBE.
See ASMBE User's
Guide*2.
Install Standby/Hibernation
Lock driver.
See appendix of ASMBE
User's Guide*2.
End
*1 You can create RAID by using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. In this case, only you need to do is to set the
HostRAID feature to "Enabled" by using BIOS setup utility.
*2 ASMBE User's Guide: Adaptec Storage ManagerTM - Browser Edition User's Guide.
You may view or print the Adaptec Storage Manager™ - Browser Edition User's Guide from the
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
5-50 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 6
Installing and Using Utilities
This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your
server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
6-2 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is an automated software integration tool to help simplify the process of
installing and configuring your server. Shipped with all NEC servers, the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM provides a flexible, guided installation process for system
administrators to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows 2000 or other
operating systems (contact your service representative for the server certified operating systems).
NOTE: Before using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup,
complete the hardware configuration.
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes two distinct programs. One can be booted under DOS for
initial setup, and one is for use under Windows operating system.
„
DOS-based with local console
Used to set up the server at the first time. This program is also used to diagnose the
server and to install/uninstall the management utilities on the maintenance partition of the
system drive.
Installing and Using Utilities
„
6-3
Windows-based
This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the Microsoft
Windows system (Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can install
the several applications and read the documentation from the menu.
6-4 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console
This subsection describes the procedures for using NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with
local console.
Starting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The following procedure instructs you to start NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CDROM while NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is running.
1.
Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into the CDROM drive of your server.
3.
Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.
Installing and Using Utilities
6-5
Express Setup
"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides
the user easily through the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen
prompts for software selection and configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers,
applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the desired operating system.
If you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000, after a few tasks are completed, all that
remains to be done is to remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and install the Windows
CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge the license agreement.
IMPORTANT:
„
The Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server
system and, therefore, the Express Setup clears the contents of the
hard disk.
„
Once Express setup is started, do not remove "Configuration
Diskette" from the floppy disk drive without any directions.
Tools
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It provides more installation options than
Express Setup and permits the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line
Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic utility, set up a maintenance partition, and update the
various BIOS programs.
Tools Menu
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
Off-line Maintenance Utility
System Diagnostics
Create Support Disk
Setup Maintenance Partition
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
Help
Return to the Top Menu
„
RAID Board: Present
Total Drives: 1
Drives in Group: 1
Hot Spares: 1
RAID Level: 7
Write Mode: WRITE_THRU
Maint Part: Present
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or
restored from the floppy disk.
– Save Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information on the disk mirroring controller is saved into the floppy
disk. If you set or change RAID, always use this function to save the configuration
information into the floppy disk.
IMPORTANT: Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this
function. In that case, this menu will not be shown.
6-6 Installing and Using Utilities
– Restore Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard
disk on the disk mirroring controller.
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the
configuration information.
When the defected disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information on
the hard disk must be saved into the disk array controller.
However, if the configuration information on the new disk mirroring controller is saved
into a hard disk, use this function to restore the configuration information.
IMPORTANT:
„ Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In that
case, this menu will not be shown.
„ This is a function for maintenance. Please do not use it except
maintenance.
„
Off-line Maintenance Utility
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program that performs
preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 8 or online help
for details.
„
System Diagnostics
Executes various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and
if the connection between the server and additional board is normal.
After the System Diagnostics is executed, a system check program assigned to each model
starts. See Chapter 7 for details.
„
Create Support Disk
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities
that you can put on floppy disks and load onto your system.
Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM. If your system has the Windows operating system, you may find it more
convenient to use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-based to make support disks.
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management in the
future. Customers are to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
– Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition. (No need
to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)
Installing and Using Utilities
6-7
– Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows 2000 Server. (This disk is utilized for
Windows 2000 clean installation and for Recovery for Windows 2000 system.) (No
need when installing the operating system with the Express Setup.)
– ROM-DOS Startup FD
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.
– Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.
„
Setup Maintenance Partition
Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk.
About 55MB of the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and
executable commands.
In this menu, you can create the maintenance partition, install the various utilities, and
update the utilities. The maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are
system diagnostics and Off-line Maintenance Utility.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu. If
the processing is discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.
„
The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from
the operating system. In order to retain the Configuration Data,
do not delete the partition.
NOTES:
„
The maintenance partition, once created, will not be recreated
again.
„
When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu items
do not appear.
– Create Maintenance Partition
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55MB of the maintenance partition on the
system disk (or disk array system) as work area. The various utilities are installed
when the maintenance partition is created successfully or when the maintenance
partition is already created.
– Install Maintenance Partition Utilities
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.
– Update Maintenance Partition Utilities
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk. This
menu is only used when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or
attached with your system.
6-8 Installing and Using Utilities
– FDISK
Execute FDISK command of ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete partitions,
etc.
„
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the
server by using the update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from NEC
customer service representative.
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from the floppy
disk, and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program
is running. If the update processing is discontinued, the system
becomes unable to start.
„
Help
Displays explanations about various functions of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
Return to the Top Menu
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.
Installing and Using Utilities
6-9
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)
The Master Control Menu is used to,
„
Read documentation,
„
Install the management software, and
„
Install the viewer application (Adobe Acrobat Reader).
NOTES:
„
Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or later) or
Windows NT 4.0 (or later).
„
Some documents are provided in the PDF format. Use the Adobe
Acrobat Reader to read these documents.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Master Control Menu
appears on the screen automatically. If the Autorun function is invalid in your system, run the
\MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly. Some items are grayed-out when the logon user does
not have the authority of the administrator or the item is not proper for the system.
To use Master Control Menu,
„
Click on [Online Document], [Setup] or [Quit], or
„
Click the right mouse button on Master Control Menu window.
6-10 Installing and Using Utilities
CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool to create [Configuration Diskette] that is used for
configuring the server with the Express Setup (see Chapter 5 for details).
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette
Creator to operate the setup, you can setup from the installation of OS to several utilities
automatically except for a few key input to confirm the specification. Also, you can install the
system with the same specification as before when re-installing the system. We recommend you to
create [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
IMPORTANT: You can not create [Configuration Diskette] for
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
NOTE: You can install Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000
without [Configuration Diskette]. Also, you can modify/newly create
[Configuration Diskette] during the setup with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
Creating Configuration Diskette
This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for OS installation and
creating [Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.
NOTE: In the procedure below, the folder name that is specified when
installing Trekking command is assumed as [Configuration Diskette
Creator].
1.
Start the OS.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu will appear.
3.
Right-click on the screen or left-click [Software Setup]. The menu will appear.
Installing and Using Utilities
4.
6-11
Click [Configuration Diskette Creator].
Configuration Diskette Creator window is displayed.
5.
Click [Create New Information files] from the [File] menu.
The [Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.
6.
Specify each item and click [OK].
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Basic
Information] dialog box.
6-12 Installing and Using Utilities
7.
Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.
When completing the specification of setup information, the [Save Setup Information]
dialog box will appear.
8.
Confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for
the Setup File in [File Name].
9.
Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].
Now [Configuration Diskette] has been created. [Configuration Diskette] is used when
you install Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000. Put a label and keep it where it will
not be lost.
NOTE: For the information on the contents of each specifying item,
refer to the Help.
If you want to modify the information file that already exists, click [Modify information
files] on Configuration Diskette Creator window. Refer to the Help to modify the inf file.
Installing and Using Utilities
6-13
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by the Express Setup, follow the procedure
below to create [Configuration Diskette].
1.
Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.
2.
From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].
[Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.
3.
Specify each item and click on [OK].
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Disk
Environment] dialog box.
4.
Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click on [Next].
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.
5.
When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for mass storage
device].
6.
When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the
[Configuration Diskette] check box is checked, and input file name for the Setup File in
[File Name].
7.
Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].
6-14 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC ESMPRO
The NEC ESMPRO (referred to as ESMPRO hereafter) lets a system administrator manage remote
servers across a network. ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations,
failures, and performance. With log data collected by ESMPRO, a system administrator can track
long-term and short-term performance, monitor server usage, create graphs to record trends, and
check server failure rates. The administrator can use the information collected to create more
efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage.
IMPORTANT: The NEC ESMPRO will start five minutes after the
system startup due to initial operation of server management logic on
the mother board.
Functions and Features
The ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network.
These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation, system extension, and
transfer tasks. Some features of ESMPRO Manager include:
„
Hardware and software server configuration
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the CPU, memory, disks, disk arrays,
and LAN boards.
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each
server.
„
Server failures
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type,
location, cause, and suggested corrective action.
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature,
memory failure, crashes, and software failure information.
„
Performance
– ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and
displays information, such as the rate of CPU load, memory usage, disk usage, and
LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and
prevent server overloads.
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online
document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Installing and Using Utilities
6-15
Adaptec Storage Manager - Browser Edition
Adaptec Storage Manager - Browser Edition (hereinafter abbreviated to ASMBE) is a Web-based
application that locally or remotely manages HostRAID storage system and provides RAID
functions through the SCSI interface in your server. You can use the following functions for
HostRAID by installing ASMBE in your system.
Features
„
Creating disks at a level of RAID0, RAID1, or RAID10
„
Creating Hot Spare disks that are to be used for automatically executing Rebuild if a
redundant disk array enters the Degraded state
„
Making a consistency check on redundant disk arrays
„
Recording HostRAID events into the event log
„
Omitting the installation of client software into each management PC if the previously
mentioned browser is installed. This is because ASMBE uses the browser (Internet
Explorer 5.5 or later).
Before attempting to operate ASMBE, read the "Adaptec Storage ManagerTM - Browser Edition
User's Guide" included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. The manual explains the ASMBE
installation procedure and notes on operating ASMBE.
Promise Array Management
Promise Array Management is a RAID management utility for monitoring serial ATA RAID
controller.
Refer to online documentation (pdf format) contained in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM for
detailed explanation.
6-16 Installing and Using Utilities
Power Console Plus
Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system of the disk array controller (MegaRAID
controller) produced by LSI Logic. Use of Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g., monitoring
and maintenance) of RAID systems that are constructed on local NEC Express servers and NEC
Express servers connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on
graphical screens without the system being stopped.
Major Functions
Power Console Plus has the following features:
„
Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration
„
Enabling the change of RAID levels
„
Being compatible with SAF-TE
„
Supporting the performance monitor
„
Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring, and
fan monitoring
„
Enabling the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive
„
Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration
„
Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate
Components
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:
„
SNMP Agent
This function is not yet supported. Do not install SNMP Agent.
„
MegaRAID Service Monitor
Enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs.
Install MegaRAID Service Monitor in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID
controller is mounted.
„
MegaRAID Client
Controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the NEC
Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that
is connected through the NEC Express server and network.
„
MegaRAID Server
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID Server in
the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted.
Installing and Using Utilities
„
6-17
MegaRAID Registration Server
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install in one of NEC
Express servers and management PCs that are connected through network. The above
components must be installed correctly for establishing the environment to use Power
Console Plus.
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and
management PC.
„
Server:
NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted
Install the following three components in this server:
– MegaRAID Service Monitor
– MegaRAID Server
– MegaRAID Client
„
Management PC:
Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network (TCP/IP)
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4.0
Terminal Server Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC component.
Management PC does not guarantee operation on Client, which used Terminal Server,
Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after the Power On machine that installed
"Server" and "Management Server".
Install the following component in this PC:
– MegaRAID Client
„
Management server:
Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs
Install the following component in one of the servers or management PCs:
– MegaRAID Registration Server
6-18 Installing and Using Utilities
Server Setup
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in the NEC Express server in which the MegaRAID
controller is mounted.
Operating Environment
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a
server.
„
Hardware
– Machine:
NEC Express5800 series connected with the MegaRAID controller
– Memory:
Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more
– Free space of the hard disk:
5MB or more
– Display unit:
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
– Required peripheral equipment:
Network Interface card
CD-ROM unit
Pointing device such as a mouse
„
Software
– Microsoft Windows Server 2003
– Microsoft Windows 2000
– Microsoft Windows XP
Installing and Using Utilities
6-19
Management PC Setup
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network
(TCP/IP).
Operating Environment
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a
management PC.
„
Hardware
– Machine:
NEC Express5800 series
PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a CPU at least equivalent
to it)
– Memory:
Size large enough for OS operation + 8MB or more
– Free space of the hard disk:
5 MB or more
– Display unit:
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
– Required peripheral equipment:
Network Interface card
CD-ROM unit
Pointing device such as a mouse
„
Software
– Microsoft Windows Server 2003
– Microsoft Windows 2000
– Microsoft Windows XP
– Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me (Internet Explorer 5.5 or later)
– Microsoft Windows NT Version 4.0
(Windows NT Version 4.0 Service Pack 6a + Internet Explorer 5.5 or later)
6-20 Installing and Using Utilities
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or
storing the server.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES
NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server
on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools, consult
with your sales agent.
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System
Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup
copy of the system information.
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array
configuration. When your hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is recommended to
make a backup copy of the configuration data. To make a backup copy of the configuration data,
use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on the optional disk array
controller board. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.
7-2 Maintenance
CLEANING
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages
1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
■
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.
Maintenance
Cleaning the Server
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the
procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:
IMPORTANT:
„
To avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not use
volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server.
„
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of
server, and the inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not
moisten them with water.
1.
Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
2.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
3.
Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.
4.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and
squeeze it firmly.
5.
Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.
6.
Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, wipe the server with it once again.
7.
Wipe the server with a dry cloth.
8.
Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.
7-3
7-4 Maintenance
Cleaning the Interior
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of
the interior of the server, especially around the mother board.
Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a
buildup can prevent proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server
components. Also, dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials that can cause short circuits
or corrosion of electrical contacts.
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is
located. For most office environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months.
For more severe environments, clean the interior every 6 months.
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover.
You will need a small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection),
computer grade canned air, and a small brush for cleaning the interior.
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.
WARNING
Unplug all power cords.
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is present
inside the server and display unit even after the power is turned off. All voltage
is removed only when the power cord is unplugged.
1.
Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.
2.
Remove the left side cover. (See Chapter 9.)
3.
Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the mother board.
4.
Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the mother board.
5.
Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the
interior of the server.
6.
Reinstall the left side cover.
7.
Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.
(See Chapter 9.)
Maintenance
7-5
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp
goes off), and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth.
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep
the mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the
mouse regularly:
1.
Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and
cotton swabs.
2.
Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
3.
Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove
it.
4.
Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and
turn your hand holding the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward).
The mouse ball is released onto your palm.
Mouse ball
Mouse ball cover
Bottom View
Roller
5.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and
squeeze it firmly.
6.
Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in
Step 5.
7.
Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.
8.
Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe
stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.
9.
Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.
10.
Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.
11.
Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.
7-6 Maintenance
Cleaning CD-ROM
A dusty CD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD-ROM regularly:
1.
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit).
2.
Press the CD tray Open/Close button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.
The tray opens.
3.
Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your hand.
4.
Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the CD-ROM drive. Doing
so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.
5.
Push on the tray front to close the tray.
6.
Wipe the signal side of the CD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Wipe CD-ROMs from the center to the outside. Use
only CD-ROM cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM with record
spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner causes damage to the CD-ROM
contents. At worst, inserting the CD-ROM into the server may cause
failure.
Maintenance
7-7
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.
Use the System Diagnostics program in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to
diagnose the server.
Test Items
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.
„
Memory
„
CPU cache memory
„
Hard disk used as a system
IMPORTANT: When executing the System Diagnostics, make sure to
remove the LAN cable. Executing the System Diagnostics with the
LAN cable connected, the network may be influenced.
NOTE: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the disk.
7-8 Maintenance
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics
Procedures to start the diagnostics program is as follows:
1.
Shutdown the OS, and turn off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.
2.
Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.
3.
Plug the power cord and turn on the server.
4.
Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to reboot the server.
See the Chapter 6 "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for details.
The following menu appears when started the server using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
5.
Select [Tools].
Maintenance
6.
7-9
Select [System Diagnostics].
The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes.
When the diagnosis completes, the screen of the display changes in the following
indication.
Diagnosis tool title
Test windows title
TeDoLi(TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00(Build020901.1.1m)
Test result
Test End
Start10:06:58 End 10:09:58
Test End : NormalEnd
03
<System>
MEM
Memory
CACHE
Cache
<SCSI>
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W
[Enter] Detail Information
Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00
AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00
16 count
49 count
NormalEnd
NormalEnd
89 count
NormalEnd
[ESC] Return to Enduser Menu
Guide line
Test window
Diagnosis tool title: shows a name of this diagnosis and Version information.
Test windows title: shows the progress of diagnosis. When it completes, it shows "Test
End"
Test Result:
shows the information including time of start, end and progress, and
result of the diagnosis.
Guide line:
shows a description of keys to navigate the window.
Test window:
Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the diagnosis.
If an error is detected during the System Diagnostics, the test result shows "Abnormal
End" in red color. Move the cursor and press Enter on the diagnosis which error
occurred. Take a note of the error message showed, and contact your sales agent.
7-10 Maintenance
7.
Follow the guideline showed in the bottom of the screen and press ESC to show the End
user Menu showed below.
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)
Enduser Menu
<Test Result>
<Device List>
<Log Info>
<Option>
<Reboot>
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.
<Test Result>
shows the screen of the diagnosis completed aforementioned.
<Device List> shows the information of all the devices connected.
8.
<Log Info>
shows the log information and error messages of the diagnosis. It can be
saved to a floppy disk. To save the log information to a floppy disk,
insert a formatted floppy disk to a floppy disk drive and select
<Save[F]>.
<Option>
change where to output log
<Reboot>
Restarts the Express Server.
Select <Reboot> in the End user Menu above.
The Express Server restarts, and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER boot the system.
9.
Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
10.
Turn off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.
11.
Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server.
12.
Plug the power code.
This completes the System Diagnostics.
Maintenance
7-11
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the
server plugged to a power source.
IMPORTANT:
„
If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in the floor
layout to a great extent, contact the sales agent.
„
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard
disk, if any.
„
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks to relocated the server
if the contains any.
1.
Take a floppy disk and a CD-ROM out of the server, if any.
2.
Power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
3.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
4.
Remove all the cables from the server.
5.
Hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons to carry the server.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the front door to lift the server. The
front door may be disengaged from the server, causing personal injury.
6.
Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.
7-12 Maintenance
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is
recommended to install the Off-line Maintenance Utility, NEC
ESMPRO, to the server and client computers.
8-2 Troubleshooting
SYSTEM VIEWERS
Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the
management PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or
Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager.
[Example]
NEC ESMPRO Manager
Troubleshooting 8-3
LAMPS
The following describes lamps on the server and their indications. See Chapter 2 for each location.
LAN ACCESS Lamp ( )
The LAN ACCESS lamp is lit green when the server is connected to LAN. The lamp blinks while
the server is accessed through the LAN (for packet transmission).
STATUS Lamp (
)
The STATUS lamp stays lit in green when the server is in successful operation. When the
STATUS lamp is unlit or lit/flashing in amber, it indicates that the server has failed.
The following table lists indications of the STATUS lamp, descriptions, and actions to take.
NOTES:
„
If the server has the NEC ESMPRO or Off-line Maintenance Utility
installed, you can view the error log to identify the cause of a
trouble.
„
To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from the OS to
and reboot it, if available. If the shutdown from the OS is not
available, disconnect and connect the power cord to reboot the
server.
8-4 Troubleshooting
STATUS lamp
indication
On (green)
Flashing
(green)
Off
Description
Procedure
The server is operating normally.
• The server is operating with the
memory or CPU in degraded
state.
• A single-bit memory error has
often occurred.
–
Check the AC POWER lamp indication
on the rear panel of the server.
Identify the device in degraded state
by using the BIOS setup utility
"SETUP," and replace it as soon as
possible.
–
Wait for a while. The STATUS lamp
turns green when POST is completed.
Turn the power off and then turn it on.
If the POST screen displays an error
message, take notes of the message,
and contact your sales representative.
The power is off.
POST is in progress.
A CPU error occurred.
A timeout occurred when the time
set for the watchdog timer arrived.
A CPU bus error occurred.
A memory dump request is made.
On (amber)
Flashing
(amber)
A temperature alarm was detected.
A voltage alarm was detected.
A fan alarm was detected.
A temperature warning was
detected.
A power supply alarm was detected.
Wait until the memory dump is
completed.
Check if the internal fans are clean
and if the fan units are firmly
connected.
If the STATUS lamp indication does
not change when the fans are normal,
contact your sales representative.
Contact your sales representative.
Check if the fan units are firmly
connected.
If the STATUS lamp indication does
not change when the fans are normal,
contact your sales representative.
Check if the internal fans are clean
and if the fan units are firmly
connected.
If the STATUS lamp indication does
not change when the fans are normal,
contact your sales representative.
Contact your sales representative.
Troubleshooting 8-5
POWER/SLEEP Lamp (
)
The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered.
When the server is off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep
mode). If the OS supports the power-saving mode such as Windows 2000, pressing the SLEEP
switch blinks the POWER/SLEEP lamp in green and places the server in the power-saving mode.
Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP lamp and place the server back in the
normal mode.
The power-saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power-saving feature. Some
OS's allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is
made to the server for a certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.
DISK ACCESS Lamp ( )
The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay.
This lamp lights in green every time any of such hard disks is accessed.
When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit in amber, it indicates that a hard disk error occurred. To
identify a failed hard disk, see the lamps provided for each hard disk.
When the DISK ACCESS lamp lashes in green and amber by turns or in amber only, it indicates that
hard disks connected to the internal disk array controller are in auto-rebuilding (reconfiguration).
Access Lamps
The access lamps for the floppy disk drive and the CD-ROM drive light when access is made to a
media in the drive.
8-6 Troubleshooting
LAN Connector Lamps
The LAN connector on the rear panel has two lamps as follows.
LINK/ACT lamp
Speed lamp
„
LINK/ACT lamp
The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the
server. If the power is supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly
connected with each other, the lamp is lit green (LINK state). If information is
transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks green (ACT state).
If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection.
If the lamp is not lit still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected.
Contact your service representative.
„
1000/100/10 lamp
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether each of the network ports normally equipped
with the server is operated through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T
network interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the network port is operated through
1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through 100BASETX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.
Troubleshooting 8-7
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.
Error Messages after Power-on
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On SelfTest). When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the
display unit.
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware
failure, use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a
keyboard controller error and stop processing.
Immediately after the server is powered
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction (simultaneous
key entry of Ctrl + Alt + Delete)
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction
„ During hardware initialization following restart of the POST
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason, restart the server once again.
If the same error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure
normal operation of the server, however, make sure to follow the following restrictions.
„
„
„
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the
screen following the server power-on.
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the
Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before
contacting your sales agent. The alarm indication would be a great
help for maintenance.
8-8 Troubleshooting
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The
following table lists error codes, error messages, and actions to take.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before
consulting with your sales agent. Alarm messages are useful
information for maintenance.
The response section in the following table is divided into three types:
„
„
„
Error
Code
0000
0003
0004
0005
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000E
000F
0010
0012
0014
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
004A
Warning:
The message is displayed on screen and the error is logged to the SEL. The system will
continue booting with a degraded state.
Pause:
The message is displayed on the screen and the boot process is paused until the appropriate
input is given to either continue the boot process or take corrective action.
Halt:
The system cannot boot unless the error is corrected.
Error Message
Response
Timer Error
CMOS Battery Low
CMOS Settings Wrong
CMOS Checksum Bad
Unlock Keyboard
PS2 Keyboard not found
KBC BAT Test failed
CMOS memory size different
RAM R/W test failed
A: Drive Error
B: Drive Error
Floppy Controller Failure
CMOS time not set
PS2 Mouse not found
Refresh timer test failed
Display memory test failed
CMOS Display Type Wrong
~<INS> Pressed
DMA Controller Error
DMA-1 Error
DMA-2 Error
Unknown BIOS error. Error code = 147 (this is really a
PMM_MEM_ALLOC_ERR)
Password check failed
Unknown BIOS error. Error code = 149 (this is really
SEGMENT_REG_ERR)
Unknown BIOS error. Error code = 14A (this is really ADM_MODULE_ERR)
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Halt
Not an error
Halt
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Not an error
Halt
Pause
Pause
Pause
Halt
Halt
Halt
Halt
Halt
Halt
Pause
Troubleshooting 8-9
Error
Code
004B
004C
004D
004E
004F
0050
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
005B
005D
005E
0120
0146
0150
0160
0161
0180
0181
0192
0193
0194
0195
0196
0197
5120
5121
5122
8104
8105
8110
8111
8120
8121
8130
8131
8140
8141
8150
8151
8160
8161
Error Message
Response
Unknown BIOS error. Error code = 14B (this is really
LANGUAGE_MODULE_ERR)
Keyboard/Interface Error
Primary Master Hard Disk Error
Primary Slave Hard Disk Error
Secondary Master Hard Disk Error
Secondary Slave Hard Disk Error
Primary Master Drive - ATAPI Incompatible
Primary Slave Drive - ATAPI Incompatible
Secondary Master Drive - ATAPI Incompatible
Secondary Slave Drive - ATAPI Incompatible
Third Master Device Error
Fourth Master Device Error
S.M.A.R.T. Status BAD, Backup and Replace
Password check failed
Thermal Trip Failure
Insufficient Memory to Shadow PCI ROM
BSP Processor failed BIST
Processor missing microcode – P0
Processor missing microcode – P1
BIOS does not support current stepping – P0
BIOS does not support current stepping – P1
L2 cache size mismatch
CPUID, Processor stepping are different
CPUID, Processor family are different
Front side bus mismatch.
CPUID, Processor Model are different
Processor speeds mismatched
CMOS Cleared By Jumper
Password cleared by jumper
CMOS Cleared By BMC Request
Warning! Port 60h/64h emulation is not supported by this USB Host
Controller !!!
Warning! EHCI controller disabled. It requires 64bit data support in the
BIOS.
Processor 01 Internal error (IERR)
Processor 02 Internal error (IERR)
Processor 01 Thermal Trip error
Processor 02 Thermal Trip error
Processor 01 disabled
Processor 02 disabled
Processor 01 failed FRB-3 timer
Processor 02 failed FRB-3 timer
Processor 01 failed initialization on last boot.
Processor 02 failed initialization on last boot.
Processor 01 unable to apply BIOS update
Processor 02 unable to apply BIOS update
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Pause
Pause
8-10 Troubleshooting
Error
Code
8170
8171
8180
8181
8190
8198
8300
8301
8305
84F1
84F2
84F3
84F4
84FF
8500
8501
8502
8504
8505
8506
8600
8601
8602
8603
Error Message
Response
Processor 01 failed BIST
Processor 02 failed BIST
BIOS does not support current stepping for Processor 1
BIOS does not support current stepping for Processor 2
Watchdog timer failed on last boot
OS boot watchdog timer failure
BaseBoard Management Controller failed Self Test
Not enough space in Runtime area!!. SMBIOS data will not be available.
Primary Hot swap Controller failed to function
BIST failed for all available processors
BaseBoard Management Controller failed to respond
BaseBoard Management Controller in Update Mode
Sensor Data Record Empty
System Event Log Full
Bad or missing memory in slot 3A
Bad or missing memory in slot 2A
Bad or missing memory in slot 1A
Bad or missing memory in slot 3B
Bad or missing memory in slot 2B
Bad or missing memory in slot 1B
Primary & Secondary BIOS ID's don't match.
Override Jumper is set to force boot from lower bank of flash ROM.
WatchDog Timer Expired(Secondary BIOS maybe bad!).
Secondary BIOS CheckSum fail.
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Warning
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Halt
Pause
Pause
Pause
Warning
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
Troubleshooting 8-11
Beep Codes
The following table lists the POST error beep codes. Prior to system video initialization, the BIOS
uses these beep codes to inform users of error conditions.
Number
of Beeps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Recommended Action
Memory refresh timer error
Parity error in base memory (first
64KB block)
Base memory read / write test error
Motherboard timer not operational
Processor error
8042 Gate A20 test error (cannot
switch to protected mode)
General exception error (processor
exception error)
Reseat the memory, or replace with known good
modules.
8
Display memory error (system video
adapter)
9
10
ROM checksum error
CMOS shutdown register read/write
error
Cache memory test failed
11
Fatal error indicating a serious problem with the
system. Consult your system manufacturer.
Before declaring the motherboard beyond all
hope, eliminate the possibility of interference by a
malfunctioning add-in card. Remove all expansion
cards except the video adapter.
- If beep codes are generated even when all other
expansion cards are absent, consult your
system manufacturer’s technical support.
- If beep codes are not generated when all other
expansion cards are absent, one of the add-in
cards is causing the malfunction. Insert the
cards back into the system one at a time until the
problem happens again. This will reveal the
malfunctioning add-in card.
If the system video adapter is an add-in card,
replace or reseat the video adapter. If the video
adapter is an integrated part of the system board,
the board may be faulty.
Fatal error indicating a serious problem with the
system. Consult your system manufacturer.
Before declaring the motherboard beyond all
hope, eliminate the possibility of interference by a
malfunctioning add-in card. Remove all expansion
cards except the video adapter.
- If beep codes are generated even when all other
expansion cards are absent, consult your
system manufacturer’s technical support.
- If beep codes are not generated when all other
expansion cards are absent, one of the add-in
cards is causing the malfunction. Insert the
cards back into the system one at a time until the
problem happens again. This will reveal the
malfunctioning add-in card.
8-12 Troubleshooting
SOLVING PROBLEMS
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow
the instruction given before asking for repair.
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the onscreen message and contact your sales agent.
Problems with NEC Express Server
No screen display appears with beep:
T Are DIMMs installed securely?
→ Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly.
→ Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific
bank. See Chapter 9 for the specifications of DIMMs.
→ DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order:
#1A and #1B, and then #2A and #2B.
→ Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered.
When two pairs of the DIMMs are installed, the largest pair of the DIMMs must
be installed to slots #2A and #2B.
→ Installed DIMMs starting from the one having largest memory.
→ Take a note of beep code pattern, and take appropriate action according to the
table listed earlier in "Beep Codes".
Fail to power on the server:
T Is the server is properly supplied with power?
→ Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the
power specifications for the server.
→ Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord
for broken shield or bent plugs.
→ Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.
→ If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it
outputs power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS
SETUP utility of the server.
<Menu to check: [Server] - [Resume on AC Power Loss]>
T Did you press the POWER switch?
→ Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn of the power (the
POWER/SLEEP lamp lights).
Troubleshooting 8-13
Fail to power off the server:
T Is the POWER switch enabled?
→ Restart the server and start the BIOS SETUP utility.
<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]>
T Is the server running in the Secure Mode?
→ The POWER switch is disabled in the Secure Mode. (Forced shutdown is also
not available.) To release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the
BIOS SETUP utility.
POST fails to complete:
T Is the DIMM board installed?
→ At least two DIMM boards are required for operation.
→ DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order:
#1A and #1B, and then #2A and #2B.
→ Installed DIMMs starting from the one having largest memory.
T Is the memory size large?
→ The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for
a while.
T Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the
server?
→ If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST
may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding. In
such a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard or
mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the
server.
T Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?
→ Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
8-14 Troubleshooting
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):
T Are cables properly connected?
→ Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.
T Is the power-on order correct?
→ When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external
devices first, then the server.
T Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?
→ Some optional devices require specific device drivers.
comes with the device to install its driver.
Refer to the manual that
The POWER switch and sleep feature are disabled:
T Is the server in the Secure Mode?
→ In the Secure Mode, the POWER switch and sleep feature are disabled. To
release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP
utility.
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:
T Is the cable properly connected?
→ Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the
server.
→ The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is
powered (not applicable to USB devices). Power of the server first and connect
it properly.
T Are the server drivers installed?
→ Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.)
Some OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to
manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings
are correct.
T Is the server in the Secure Mode?
→ In the Secure Mode, the keyboard and mouse are disabled. To release the Secure
Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility.
Troubleshooting 8-15
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:
T Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?
→ Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.
T Is the floppy disk write-protected?
→ Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.
T Is the floppy disk formatted?
→ Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk.
T Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server.
Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Floppy Configuration]>
T Is the server in the Secure Mode?
→ In the Secure Mode, write access to the floppy disk may be disabled. To release
the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS SETUP utility.
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:
T Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?
→ The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the
CD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.
T Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?
→ The CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.
Inserted the correct CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed:
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.
OK
T Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or injured?
→ Take the CD-ROM out of the CD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty or
injured, reset and click [OK].
8-16 Troubleshooting
Fail to access the hard disk:
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)
T Is the hard disk applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.
T Is the hard disk properly installed?
→ Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not
connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed (see
Chapter 9).
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:
T Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.
T Is the cable connection changed?
→ The SCSI connector on the motherboard in the server can be used for either builtin file devices or external SCSI devices. The connection to built-in or external
devices can be switched by modifying cable connection properly. See Chapter
10.
T Are SCSI devices properly configured?
→ When the server has external SCSI devices connected, hard disk settings,
including SCSI ID and terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes
with the SCSI device for details.
T Are the SCSI controllers properly configured?
→ Use the SCSI configuration utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices
connected to the optional SCSI connector on the mother board. When the server
has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it, use
the SCSI configuration utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for
proper configuration. See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI
controller for details.
Troubleshooting 8-17
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows
Server 2003 x64 Editions.
Source:
DCOM
Category:
Error
Event ID:
10016
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation
permission for the COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E4E51-800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL
SERVICE} SID {S-1-5-19}.
This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative
tool.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
Problems with Windows Server 2003
When network cable isn't connected with a port, the following log may be found in event log.
But this has no affect on the behavior of LAN driver.
Event ID:
6
Source:
E100B
Type:
Error
Description: Hardware failure detected.
Machine:
Express5800/<Your Model Name>
Lan:
100BASE
Solution:
Connect a network cable in a port and then reboot the system or change the
[Smart Power Down] value to "Off", the log will not be found in event log
any more.
8-18 Troubleshooting
Problems with Windows 2000
Cannot install the operating system correctly.
T Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?
→ See Chapter 6.
During Windows 2000 installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the
Event Viewer:
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0
during the paging operation.
→ There is no problem on this issue.
Fail to start the OS:
T Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?
→ Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.
T Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive?
→ Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.
T Is the OS broken?
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.
System" in this Chapter.)
(See "Recovery for Windows 2000
The event log after every logon to Windows 2000 includes the following error log:
Description (D)
The CPUs in this multiprocessor system are not all the same revision level.
To use all processors the operating system restricts itself to the features of
the least capable processor in the system. Should problems occur with
this system, contact the CPU manufacture to see if this mix of processors
is supported.
T Has the CPU been expanded?
→ If the different revision (stepping) of the processor is installed in the
multiprocessor system, Windows 2000 logs the above information every startup.
If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.
The OS presents unstable operation:
T Did you update the system?
→ Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable
operation. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system.
(See Chapter 6.)
Troubleshooting 8-19
Unable to update the system:
T Are you trying to update the system without applying Service Pack or with Service
Pack 1, 2, or 3?
→ Without applying Service Pack and applying Service Pack 1, 2, or 3 to this system
are not supported.
You have to apply Service Pack 4 to update the system.
If you use Windows 2000 CD-ROM which includes Service Pack 4 to install
Windows 2000 on your system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again
when you update the system.
The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is
adjusted to automatically restarting:
→ When the system does not restart automatically, restart it manually.
The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is NOT
adjusted to automatically restarting:
→ There is no problem about this issue.
Check the System Event Log to confirm that STOP error occurred.
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:
→ If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced shutdown
(forced shutdown: continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds). The power
will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds.
8-20 Troubleshooting
The server is not found on the network:
T Is the LAN cable connected?
→ Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server.
Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms to the network interface
standard.
T Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the
server. Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility.
<Menus to check:
[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Onboard NIC1 (10/100/1000) / Onboard
NIC1 (10/100/1000) ROM]>
T Have the protocol and service already configured?
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.
T Is the transfer speed correct?
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link Speed
& Duplex" value the same as the value specified for HUB.
Troubleshooting 8-21
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:
T Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server?
→ If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the
server, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.
T Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server.
Use the BIOS SETUP utility to change the boot device order to boot the system
from the CD-ROM drive first.
<Menu to check: [Boot]>
T Is an error message appeared?
→ When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, the
following message appears. After this message appears, check the error and take
the appropriate corrective action according to the message listed in the table
below.
Message
This machine is not supported.
NvRAM access error
Hard disk access error
Cause and Remedy
This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not
designed for this server. Execute the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server.
An access to the nonvolatile memory
(NvRAM) is not acceptable.
The hard disk is not connected or it is failed.
Check whether the hard disk is correctly
connected.
8-22 Troubleshooting
Problems with Express Setup
Express Setup can not be used
→ Express Setup does not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003
x64 Editions. If you want to perform re-setup, see Appendix D and perform
"Manual Setup".
Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk that has
smaller capacity than the specified partition size:
The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk.
The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.
Setup will continue the process.
OK
→ It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.
The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD-ROM or checking
CD-ROM:
→ Press R. When the message appears again even if you press R, restart the Express
Setup from the beginning. In case the same result occurred after the restart of
installation, contact Maintenance Service Company and ask them to check the CDROM drive.
Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.
→ There are some errors on the specified setup information.
Follow the instruction to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the
installation. On Windows 2000, you might be asked to press Enter again after the
last reboot of the setup.
[Complete] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.
→ If you click [Complete] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup
for the later specification to continue the process.
<The Default Value for Windows 2000>
The specification of network protocol
Protocol :
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]
Service :
Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer.
Client :
Microsoft network client.
Component :
SNMP, IIS (Excluding Professional and Windows Server 2003)
Application :
NEC ESMPRO Agent
Adaptec Storage Manager - Browser Edition (if the onboard
HostRAID controller is enabled)
Power Console Plus
(if optional SCSI RAID controller is installed in the system)
Promise Array Management
(if optional SATA RAID controller is installed in the system)
Troubleshooting 8-23
[Complete] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.
→ The [Complete] does not appear if the Setup File that has already been created is
loaded.
→ [Complete] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen.
Once you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [Complete] will not
appear even if you enter [Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.
Select [Use Existing Array] at [New/Existing RAID Configuration], but the OS is installed in the
whole area of the disk.
→ Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance area)?
If the partition other than the one to re-use does not exist, the setup will reserve the
whole area of the disk to install Windows 2000.
Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.
→ When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the
system as Workgroup. Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the
Domain.
Specified large value as partition size, but when Windows 2000 is actually started, the system
partition is created by 4095MB.
→ Is the [Partition Size] specified by the value larger than the real area? If you want to
create one partition in all area of the hard disk (excluding the maintenance area) to
install the OS, specify [All Area].
→ Are you specifying over 200GB for the partition size?
Be sure to specify less than 200GB for the partition size.
Windows 2000 started with different display resolution from the specified value.
→ If the specified display resolution can not be used, the system will use the nearest
value or the default value of the driver.
Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.
→ Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start.
However, the setup will stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in this
case, input request will occur when rebooting after GUI setup completed during
Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem on Windows
2000 setup.
8-24 Troubleshooting
The following message appears on the screen and the setup is suspended while the Express
Setup is executing:
Bad Command or filename
Insufficient disk space
→ Follow the procedure described below and check the BIOS settings for the SCSI
controller.
As for the procedure on the SCSI controller which is not described in this User's
Guide, refer to the manual accompanied with the controller and check the setting for
"Int13 Extensions".
<In case the SCSI Controller is AIC-7892>
1. Press Ctrl + A when POST displays "AIC-7892".
2. Select "Configure/View Host Adapter Settings".
3. Select "Advanced Configuration Options" and press Enter.
4. Change the setting of "BIOS Support for Int13 Extensions" to "Enabled".
5. Exit from BIOS setup menu and restart the system.
6. Start the Express Setup.
Unable to specify the details of Network adapter.
→ In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter.
from Control Panel after starting Windows 2000.
Specify them
Windows 2000 is started with Network adapter that has not been specified during Express
Setup
→ Windows 2000 will install the recognized Network adapter specified as default value.
If you want to modify the specification, it can be done from Control Panel after
starting Windows 2000. Also, the Network adapter that has been specified during
Express Setup but that is not connected will not be setup, though the protocol will
only be installed.
Connected more than two Network adapter and specified different protocol for each adapter,
but all the protocols are specified on either adapter.
→ It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used.
The value that can not be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by
default value.
Troubleshooting 8-25
When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP
protocol are all set to use DHCP.
→ When more than two Network adapter are specified, the detailed specification of the
protocol may all be set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.
Not more than two Network adapter is connected, but the detailed specification of the protocol
are all set by default. (e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP is specified)
→ Are you specifying more than two protocols?
In this case, the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network
adapter, so the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by default.
Re-specify the details from Control Panel after starting the OS.
The following error log is included in the event log while operating the system:
<Windows 2000>
Event ID:
16
Source:
iANSMiniport
Type:
Error
Category:
None
Description: Team #0: The last adapter has lost link.
Network connection has been lost.
Event ID:
11
Source:
iANSMiniport
Type:
Warning
Category:
None
Description: Adapter link down: Intel(R) 82546EB Based Dual Port Network
Connect...
→ Though the above error is included in the event log when specifying the teaming,
the LAN driver can work properly.
8-26 Troubleshooting
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration
When an error is detected during the automatic Disk Array Configuration of the Easy Setup process,
any of the following messages appears.
An illegal device status exists in the status table.
„ An illegal status is returned during the Configuration Data read.
„ Configured device(s) is not responded.
„ The configuration in NvRAM does not agree with the configuration in EEPROM.
„ The number of pack configuring disks is 0 or 9 or above.
„ An error occurs during the configuration table read.
„ The configuration table in NvRAM cannot be read.
„ An illegal RAID level exists in the configuration table.
„ An error occurs during the CONFIG2 table transfer.
„ The adapter is not responded.
„ A CONFIG2 checksum error occurred.
„ Adapter is not exists.
When one of above messages is observed, the Disk Array controller or the hard disk drive may be
failed. Check that cable connections and switch settings are correct, and then attempt to run NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER once again.
„
Problems with Master Control Menu
The master control menu fails to appear:
T Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?
→ The menu is only able to run on Windows NT 4.0 (or later) or Windows 95 (or
later).
T Is Shift pressed?
→ Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.
T Is the system in the proper state?
→ The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing
to set the CD-ROM. In such a case, start the Explorer and run \MC\1ST.EXE in
the CD-ROM.
Troubleshooting 8-27
Collecting Event Log
This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server.
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow
the procedure below after restarting the system.
NOTE: The different revision processor may be mixed in additional
CPU kit. When Windows 2000 is used, following message may be
appeared in the System Log of the Event Viewer after extension the
different revision of two or more CPUs in the NEC Express server. If
this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.
1.
Click [Management Tool] → [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel.
2.
Select the type of the log to collect.
On [Application Log], the events related to the running application is archived. On
[Security Log], the events related to the security is archived. On [System Log], the
events occurred at the item which configures Windows 2000 system is archived.
3.
Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.
4.
Input the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.
5.
Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and click [OK].
For more information, refer to Windows Online Help.
8-28 Troubleshooting
Collect Configuration Information
This section describes on how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside
specification.
In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow
the procedure below after restarting the system.
<For Windows Server 2003>
Refer to Windows online help.
<For Windows 2000>
1.
Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].
The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [System Tool] → [System Information].
4.
Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.
5.
Input the file name to save in the [File Name] box.
6.
Click [Save].
Troubleshooting 8-29
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the
information can be specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 5.
Memory Dump
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the
label. You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like. For more
information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump (Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5 for
detail)".
IMPORTANT:
„
Consult with your sales agent before dumping the memory.
Dumping the memory while the server is in the successful operation
may affect the system operation.
„
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message
indicating insufficient virtual memory. Ignore this message and
proceed. Restarting the system may result in dumping improper
data.
Preparing for Memory Dumping
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is
required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if
"Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit" on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility,
SETUP, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the
server.
1.
Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility, SETUP.
2.
Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.
3.
Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.
8-30 Troubleshooting
Saving the Dump File
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a
straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch.
1
2
DUMP switch
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory dumping may
not be available when the CPU stalls.)
Troubleshooting 8-31
RECOVERY FOR Windows 2000 SYSTEM
If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged, use the following procedures to recover the
system.
IMPORTANT:
„
After recovering the system, see "Updating the System" in Chapter
5 and be sure to update the system.
Also on Windows 2000, you need to update all the drivers after the
system update. For more information, see "Installing and Setting
Device Drivers" in Chapter 5.
„
If the hard disk can not be recognized, you can not recover the
system.
Follow the procedure below and use the information in the disk, not system recovery disk, to
recover the system.
1.
Turn on the power of the system.
2.
Insert Windows 2000 CD- ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your server.
3.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the server. (You may
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
4.
Press F6 while the message "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware
configuration..." is displayed at the upper part of the screen.
NOTE: Nothing is changed on the screen through F6 is pressed.
5.
Press S when the following message appears:
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
Select [Other] and press Enter.
6.
Insert Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk
drive and press Enter.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
* Press ENTER when ready.
8-32 Troubleshooting
7.
Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– INITIO INI-A10XU2W SCSI Host Adapter (When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 Controller Driver (When N8103-80F board is installed.)
– Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000) (When N8103-75F board is installed.)
– Promise FastTrak S150 SX4(tm) Controller-Intel x86 platform (When N8103-78 board
is installed.)
– Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver For Windows 2000/XP/2003 (When
HostRAID is installed.)
– Promise FastTrak S150 SX4100(tm) Controller-Intel x86 platform (When N8103-89
board is installed.)
8.
Press R to select the recovery option.
9.
If you are requested, press R to select system recovery procedure.
10.
If you are requested, select either of the procedure below:
[Manual Recovery] (Press M)
Do not select this option unless you are a high-level user or a system administrator.
If you use this option, you can recover the problems of system files, partition boot
sector, and start-up environment.
[Quick Recovery] (Press F)
This option is very easy to use and the user does not need to do anything during the
procedure. If you select this option, the system recovery disk program starts to
recover the problems concerning system files, partition boot sector of system disk,
and start-up environment (if multiple operating systems are installed on the system).
11.
Follow the instruction displayed on the screen, and then press L at the screen which
request you to insert system recovery disk. The system will be restarted once.
NOTE: Starts the procedure without system recovery disk.
12.
Repeat steps 4 to 9.
The recovery procedure will be started.
During the recovery, the missing files and the damaged files are replaced either to the files
in C:\ I386 folder of hard disk or the files in systemroot\ Repair of the system partition.
These replaced files do not reflect the changes of the configuration after the setup at all.
13.
Follow the instruction displayed on the screen.
If you take a note of any file name in which trouble is detected during the procedure, it is
useful to diagnose how the system has been damaged.
14.
Terminates the procedure if the recovery is successful.
You can verify that the replaced files are correctly copied to the hard disk if the computer
is restarted normally.
Troubleshooting 8-33
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When you are
unable to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line
Maintenance Utility can be used.
IMPORTANT:
„
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales
agent. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line
Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a file
that describes operation of the utility, but do not attempt to use the
utility by yourself. Contact your sales agent and follow
instructions.
„
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a
client to the server.
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.
„
From the CD-ROM
Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot the
system.
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance Utility".
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.
„
From the floppy disk
Set the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the
system.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting "Tools" - "Create
Support FD" on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
Manual start (by pressing F4)
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up screen of
the server is on screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk.
8-34 Troubleshooting
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features vary
depending on the way you started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)
IMPORTANT: See the on-line help for details of the Off-line
Maintenance Utility. For further information, ask your sales agent.
„
IPMI Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and
field replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them. Using this feature, you
can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.
„
BIOS Setup Viewer
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP
utility to a text file.
„
System Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to
a text file.
„
System Information Management
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may not be
restored.
Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data.
„
Start of Utilities
With the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installed in the
maintenance partition.
–
System Diagnostics
–
Maintenance Partition Update
Troubleshooting 8-35
RESETTING THE SERVER
There are two ways to reset the server.
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the
data in process. To reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure
that no processing is in progress.
„
Hard reset
Press the RESET switch at the front of the server.
„
Soft reset
If the server halts before starting the OS, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.
This restarts the server.
8-36 Troubleshooting
FORCED SHUTDOWN
Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not
turn off the server, or resetting does not work.
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is forcibly
turned off. To turn on the power back again, wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the
power (forced shutdown).
Press here for at
least 4 seconds.
IMPORTANT: If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the
power once to load the OS, and turn off the power again in the normal
way.
Chapter 9
Upgrading Your Server
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or
removing such optional devices, and notes on using them.
IMPORTANT:
„
You may conduct the installation and removal procedures described
in this section by yourself. However, NEC is not responsible for
any machine or component defects or bad influences resulting from
the operation of the server subject to the installation or removal.
NEC recommends that you request a maintenance engineer of your
service representative having the expert knowledge on the server to
do the installation and removal procedures.
„
Use the options and cables approved by NEC. You will be charged
by any repair of a malfunction, fault, or defect occurring in a server
in which one or more component not approved by NEC are used.
„
Use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to update the system if the hardware
configuration is changed (see Chapter 5 for details).
9-2 Upgrading Your Server
SAFETY NOTES
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 13 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
■
■
■
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.
Upgrading Your Server 9-3
STATIC PRECAUTIONS
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other components.
Electronic device can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, observe the
following information.
„
Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal
part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your
body.
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static
electricity.
„
Select a suitable work space.
– Work with the server on the anti-static or concrete floor.
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be
generated, make sure take anti-static measures beforehand.
„
Use a work table.
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.
„
Clothe
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.
– Take off any jewels (a ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.
„
Handling of components
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it to the server.
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.
9-4 Upgrading Your Server
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
Prepare the installation or removal of a component depending on the following procedure:
1.
Shut down the OS.
2.
Press the POWER switch to turn off the power of the server.
goes off.)
3.
Pull out the power cord from the AC inlet on the server.
4.
Remove all the cables connected to the server on the rear panel.
5.
Make the clearance of 1m to 2m in the front and rear sides and left and right sides of the
server.
(The POWER/SLEEP lamp
Upgrading Your Server 9-5
DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure.
Side Cover
The left side cover should be removed to access to built-in devices and/or mother board in the server.
It is not necessary to remove the right side cover.
Removal
Remove the left side cover in the following procedure.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 13 to 1-8 for details.
■
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Loosen the two screws.
3.
Slide the cover backward a little.
4.
Hold the side cover securely to remove it.
Screws
9-6 Upgrading Your Server
Installation
The side cover can be installed in the reverse procedure of the removal. Make sure that the hooks
on the side cover are inserted into the frames and holes of the server securely.
IMPORTANT: After one or more optional devices are installed or
removed completely, install the removed side cover securely.
Holes
Frame
Hooks
Upgrading Your Server 9-7
Processor Air Duct
To install or remove the DIMM or processor, you will need to remove the air duct.
IMPORTANT: Do not assemble the server without installing the air
duct. No duct installed in the system reduces cooling efficiency and can
affect performance or cause damage due to overheating.
Removal
Follow these steps to remove the air duct.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the side cover.
3.
Hold the left side of the air duct, and push the right end of the tab to release from the
chassis.
4.
Remove the duct from the chassis.
9-8 Upgrading Your Server
Installation
Follow these steps to install the air duct.
1.
Holding the internal cables clear, place the air duct into the chassis.
2.
Adjust the air duct until the frame of the right end of the duct is aligned with the hook on
the chassis.
Frame
Hook
3.
Reinstall the side cover.
Upgrading Your Server 9-9
Hard Disk
The 3.5-inch hard disk drive on the front of the server contains four slots on which hard disks can be
installed. The device bay is not equipped with any hard disks (excluding when one or more builtin hard disks are ordered). Purchase the hard disks additionally if required.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use any hard disks not approved by NEC. If an unapproved
third party's hard disk is installed in the server, not only the hard
disk but also the server itself may be defected. Consult your
service representative for purchasing hard disk.
„
Observe safety precautions described in Chapter 1 and static
precautions described in this chapter before proceeding the
procedures described here.
„
For the RAID configuration, refer to the manual that comes with the
RAID controller.
9-10 Upgrading Your Server
Setting Operation Mode
Configure the operation mode of hard disks installed in the server as listed below.
#4
#3
#2
#1
„
SATA hard disk drive
Hard Disk
First hard disk
Second hard disk
Third hard disk *
Fourth hard disk *
Bay to Install
Disk bay #1
Disk bay #2
Disk bay #3
Disk bay #4
* Optional SATA RAID controller is required.
„
SCSI hard disk drive *1
Hard Disk
First hard disk
Second hard disk
Third hard disk
Fourth hard disk
Fifth hard disk *2
Sixth hard disk *2
SCSI ID
ID0
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
Start Command
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Bay to Install
Disk bay #1 (bottom)
Disk bay #2
Disk bay #3
Disk bay #4
Disk bay #5
Disk bay #6 (top)
*1 Optional SCSI controller or RAID controller is required.
*2 Optional SCSI RAID controller and hot-swap hard disk drive cage are required.
Set the SCSI termination to "OFF" for all hard disks. SCSI termination should be set to
"ON" at the end of the internal SCSI cable.
Upgrading Your Server 9-11
Installation
Install a hard disk in the following procedure. A hard disk may be installed in any other slot in the
similar procedure.
IMPORTANT: In the disk array configuration, hard disks configuring
a specific pack should have the same specification including the
capacity.
NOTE: Hard disks can be installed or removed from the server only
by opening the front door. In the disk array configuration, hard disks
may be installed or removed with the power of the server being on.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Release the lock of the front door by using the security key to open the front door.
3.
Remove the side cover.
4.
Check the slot in which the hard disk is installed.
5.
Loose two screws securing the drive carrier.
9-12 Upgrading Your Server
6.
Remove the drive carrier.
IMPORTANT: To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the
dummy tray in the vacant slot of the disk bay.
7.
Place the hard disk onto the carrier, with its connector facing the rear of the carrier.
Upgrading Your Server 9-13
8.
Turn the hard disk and carrier over and secure the hard disk in the carrier with four screws
supplied with the hard disk.
IMPORTANT: Use the screws that came with the hard disk. If not,
use the screws that came with the server.
9.
Install the drive carrier into the hard disk bay and secure the carrier to the chassis with two
screws removed in Step 5.
9-14 Upgrading Your Server
10.
Connect the interface cable and power cables. See Chapter 10 for details.
IMPORTANT:
„
Keep the socket cover removed from the power cable connector or
interface cable connector for future use.
„
For serial ATA hard disk drives, use the relay cable connector that
comes with the optional serial ATA cable as shown figure below.
Relay cable
connector
11.
Reinstall the side cover.
12.
Close the front door.
Removal
Remove the hard disk in the reverse procedure of the installation.
In the disk array configuration, the auto rebuild function can be used. The auto rebuild function
can record the information saved in a defected hard disk into the new replaced disk to recover the
server to the state before the occurrence of the fault.
The auto rebuild function is valid for disk arrays set to RAID1, RAID5, or RAID10.
Refer to the manual supplied with your RAID controller for detail explanation.
Upgrading Your Server 9-15
5.25-inch Device
The server contains four slots in which backup devices including CD-ROM and magnetic tape
drives can be installed.
Slot 3
Slot 2
Standard ATAPI
CD-ROM drive
Slot 1
IMPORTANT:
„
The server can include a maximum of two devices: two half-height
devices, or one half-height device and one full-height device.
„
Set the SCSI termination of the 5.25-inch device to be installed to
OFF and the SCSI ID to a value which is not duplicated or
corrupted with that of any other device. Refer to the
documentation coming with each of the devices for how to set the
values.
„
For half-height device, first install a device in slot 1. Then install
another device in slot 2.
For full-height device, install the device to the slots 2 and 3.
„
To install N8151-13ACF of the built-in DAT collective type [DDS3], use the power blanch cable installed on the device.
9-16 Upgrading Your Server
Installation
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the side cover.
3.
Remove the two screws fixing the dummy cover.
4.
Pull out the dummy cover toward you carefully.
NOTE: When installing a full-height device, remove two dummy
covers.
5.
Fix the rails coming with the server to the 5.25-inch device by using the four screws
coming with the device.
IMPORTANT:
„
Always use the screws coming with the 5.25-inch device. Using
longer screws or those of different diameter may cause the device to
be broken.
„
When installing a double-height device, use the DLT device rails
that come with the server.
Upgrading Your Server 9-17
6.
Push the 5.25-inch device to the device bay carefully.
NOTE: Make sure that the cables are not caught while the 5.25-inch
device is pushed into the slot.
IMPORTANT: If a 5.25-inch device occupying two slots cannot be
inserted easily, push the device to the slots with it lifted a little.
7.
Fix the rails by using the screws removed in step 3.
Half-height device
8.
Full-height device
Check whether the installed 5.25-inch device is projected too much from the front of the
server.
Check the device installed in a 5.25-inch device bay based on the CD-ROM drive
normally installed.
9-18 Upgrading Your Server
9.
Connect the SCSI and power cables to the 5.25-inch device installed from the left side of
the server.
See "Cable connection" for details.
IMPORTANT: Connector pin bending or incomplete connection may
cause a malfunction to occur. Provide the connection securely
watching the 5.25-inch device and cable connectors.
NOTE: Make sure that the cable is not caught.
To SCSI connector
on mother board
To device installed in
slot 2 of 5.25-inch
To device installed in device bay
To device installed in
slot 1 of 5.25-inch
slot 3 of 5.25-inch
device bay
device bay
Not used
Termination
connector
10.
Install the removed components.
11.
Provide the setup for the server referring to "SCSI BIOS" in Chapter 4.
Removal
Remove the 5.25-inch device in the reverse procedure of the installation.
Upgrading Your Server 9-19
PCI Board
The server contains six slots into which PCI boards can be inserted.
IMPORTANT: Any PCI board is easily affected by static electricity.
Handle a PCI board after making your body contact with a metallic
frame section of the server to discharge the static electricity on your
body. Do not make bare hands contact with terminals and components
on the PCI board. In addition, do not put the PCI board on a desk
directly. See "Static Precautions" in this chapter for details of the
static electricity.
NOTE: When a PCI board is installed, removed, or removed from the
present slot and then installed in another slot, modify the detailed
settings including the interrupt lines (IRQ) by using the BIOS setup
utility SETUP if necessary. See Chapter 4 for the settings of the
interrupt line states and I/O spaces at the shipment of the server.
PCI #5, 32-bit/33MHz, PCI
PCI #4, PCI EXPRESS (x4)
PCI #3, 32-bit/33MHz, PCI
PCI #2, 64-bit/66MHz, PCI-X
PCI #1, 64-bit/66MHz, PCI-X
Mother board
*
Do not install a set of PCI boards providing a specific function to extend over both the 64-bit and
32-bit PCI buses.
9-20 Upgrading Your Server
Installation
Install a board connected to a PCI board slot in the following procedure.
IMPORTANT:
„
3.3V or universal PCI boards can be installed in PCI board slots #1
and #2.
„
5V or universal PCI boards can be installed in PCI board slots #3
and #5.
NOTE: To install a PCI board, make sure that the board connecting
section is engaged with the connector of the PCI board slot.
List of optional devices and their available slots
N Code
Product
name
Performance
Slot
(Bus A)
PCI-X
PCI-X
#1
#2
64-bit/
66 MHz
Profile
Voltage
Board size*1
N8103-65F
N8103-56F
N8103-75F
N8103-95F
N8103-78F
N8103-89F
N8103-80F
N8104-111
N8104-86
N8104-103
N8104-113
N8104-112
N8104-114
SCSI controller
SCSI controller
SCSI controller
SCSI controller
Disk array controller (SATA)
Disk array controller (SATA)
Disk array controller (1ch)
100BASE-TX adapter
100BASE-TX adapter (2ch)
1000BASE-T adapter
1000BASE-T adapter (2ch)
1000BASE-SX adapter
1000BASE-T adapter
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.
3.3 V
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Slot
Slot
Slot
(Bus B) (Bus C) (Bus B)
PCI
PCIe
PCI
#3
#4
#5
32-bit/
32-bit/
x4
33MHz
33MHz
Full-height
5V
x8
5V
Long/Short
√
√
√
√
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Upgrading Your Server 9-21
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the side cover.
3.
Define the slot in which a board is installed and remove the connector cap of the slot.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed connector cap carefully.
4.
Remove a screw securing the I/O cover.
5.
Remove the expansion slot cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep the expansion slot cover being removed
carefully.
6.
On the edge opposite the connectors, grasp the board by both corners. Orient the board to
the vacant slot so that the metal retention bracket is toward the rear of the chassis.
9-22 Upgrading Your Server
7.
Insert the board into the front retention mechanism and rear guide rails. Carefully push the
board until it engages and fully seats in the slot connector.
IMPORTANT: If the board cannot be installed easily, remove the
board once and then reinstall it.
cause the board to be broken.
Excess force added to the board may
Guide rail
8.
Fix the board with a screw removed in Step 2.
9.
Reinstall the removed components.
10.
Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear
in POST.
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in
Chapter 8.
Removal
Remove the board in the reverse procedure of the installation. Then install the connector cap and
additional slot cover.
Upgrading Your Server 9-23
RAID Controller Board
The RAID controller board is an optional PCI board developed to improve data reliability. The
board can be installed to use the hard disks in the 3.5-inch disk bay of the server and those in
additional disk unit in the disk array configuration.
The server can include the following optional RAID controller.
„
SCSI disk array controller (N8103-80F)
„
SATA disk array controller (N8103-78F)
See the manual that comes with your RAID controller for detail.
Cautions
Note the following on the configuration of a disk array.
„
The disk array controller board is easily affected by static electricity. Handle the disk
array controller board after making your body contact with a metallic frame section of the
server to discharge the static electricity on your body. Do not make bare hands contact
with terminals and components on the disk array controller board. In addition, do not
put the disk array controller board on a desk directly. See "Static Precautions" for details
of the static electricity.
„
To change the disk array configuration or the RAID, the hard disks must be initialized.
If important data is saved in the hard disks used to constitute a disk array, first back up the
data in other hard disks before installing boards and configuring the disk array.
„
More than one hard disk is required to configure a disk array.
„
Hard disks used in the disk array configuration should have the same disk revolution rate
and capacity in packs.
„
See "PCI Board" in this Chapter for the slot in which a board can be installed.
„
Several RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive [Independent] Disks) levels can be set
for the disk array configuration in the server in which disk array controller boards are
installed. Refer to the online document saved in "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM
coming with the server or the documentation coming with the disk array controller for
details of the available RAIDs, data transfer rate, and array configuration.
„
The available capacity of the hard disks in the disk array configuration is lower than the
total capacity of the hard disks configuring the disk array while the disk reliability is
improved.
„
Replacement of disk array controller board
Restore the disk array configuration information in the disk array controller boards. Use
the configuration utility for the restoration. Refer to the online document saved in "NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM coming with the server or the documentation coming
with the disk array controller for details. If a disk array controller is replaced, create the
configuration information newly by using the proper utility.
„
Only one disk array controller board can be installed in the server.
9-24 Upgrading Your Server
Using Internal Disks in Disk Array Configuration
For the installation of the RAID controller board, see "PCI Board" and the manual that comes with
the RAID controller board. The DISK access lamp on the front panel of the server indicates the
access status of the hard disk drive connected to the RAID controller board. Before the access status
can be indicated, the LED connector on the RAID controller board and the LED connector on the
mother board must be connected through the LED cable supplied with the server.
Mother Board
„
The LED connector is at the position shown in the figure below. It can be connected in
either direction.
RAID Controller Board
„
The red cable of the LED cable comes out from the connector hole. Connect the connector
hole to "LED Active" of the LED connector on the RAID controller board. For the
position of the LED Active pin, see the manual supplied with the RAID controller board.
To the mother board
To the RAID
controller
Face this side
upward.
LED cable
Connect 2-pin LED cable.
Use the interface cable supplied with the RAID controller board. Disconnect the current cable from
the server and keep it in a designated place. For details on the cable connection, see the manual
supplied with the RAID controller board.
After installing the RAID controller board, make settings such as RAID setting, using the disk array
BIOS utility of the RAID controller board. For details on the setting procedures, see the manual
supplied with the RAID controller board.
Upgrading Your Server 9-25
Disk Array Configuration of Additional Disk Unit
The N8141-36F additional disk unit is exclusively used for installation of hard disks. The cabinet
can contain up to 14 hard disks. The server equipped with disk array controller boards can be
connected with up to two additional disk units. (See Chapter 10 or the documentation coming with
the additional disk unit for details of the additional disk units.)
IMPORTANT:
„
The additional disk unit does not contain hard disk drives.
Purchase the drives additionally.
„
To connect with additional disk unit, use the server of rack-mount
type, or use the additional disk unit of tower type (pedestal type). In
both cases, you need an optional conversion kit.
To connect the server with the N8141-36F additional disk unit, any of the following optional cables
are required:
„
K410-93(01) additional disk unit connecting SCSI cable
„
K410-93(03) additional disk unit connecting SCSI cable
„
K410-93(06) additional disk unit connecting SCSI cable
After the connection of the additional disk unit to the server, provide the disk array configuration for
the additional disk unit by using the Disk Array Configuration. See the manual that comes with the
disk array controller for details of the procedure.
In the disk array configuration of the additional disk unit, the auto rebuild function which the disk
array controller board has can recover the data if any one of hard disks installed in the additional
disk unit is defected to destroy data. (Replace the defected hard disk with a new one with the
power being on (hot-swap)).
9-26 Upgrading Your Server
SCSI Controller Board
SCSI controller board (N8103-56F/65F/75F) is a PCI board to control hard disk drives and file
devices that operate through the SCSI interface.
The SCSI controller board is necessary in the following cases:
„
Installing a file device in the 5.25-inch device bay of the server
„
Using a SCSI hard disk as an internal hard disk
„
Connecting external SCSI equipment.
Notes
The following explains notes on using the SCSI controller board:
„
The SCSI controller board is an electronic component easily affected by static electricity.
Before handling the SCSI controller board, discharge static electricity from your body by
touching the metal frame of the server or the like. Do not touch the terminals or parts of
the SCSI controller board with your bare hands, or do not place the SCSI controller board
directly on a desk. See "Static Precautions" for details on static electricity.
„
When connecting hard disks containing an OS to the SCSI controller board, install them
in the PCI slots in ascending order of the slot numbers.
„
See "PCI Board" described earlier in this chapter for slots in which boards can be
installed.
Upgrading Your Server 9-27
From Installation to Setting
For the installation of the SCSI controller board, see "PCI board". The DISK access lamp on the
front panel of the server indicates the access status of the hard disk drive connected to the SCSI
controller board. Before the access status can be indicated, the LED connector on the SCSI
controller board and the LED connector on the mother board must be connected through the LED
cable supplied with the Express server.
To the mother board
Face this side
upward.
To the SCSI
controller
LED cable
Connect 2-pin LED cable.
„
Mother Board
The LED connector is at the position shown in the figure below. It can be connected in
either direction.
„
SCSI Controller Board
The red cable of the LED cable comes out from the connector hole. Connect the connector
hole to "LED Active" of the LED connector on the disk array controller board. For the
position of the LED Active pin, see the manual supplied with the disk array controller
board.
For the connection of the interface cable, see the manual supplied with the SCSI controller board.
After installing the SCSI controller board, make settings such as the transfer rates of the board and
connected devices, using the SCSI BIOS utility of the SCSI controller board. For details on the
setting procedures, see the manual supplied with the SCSI controller board.
9-28 Upgrading Your Server
Processor
The mother board includes two Intel Xeon ZIF sockets. The primary and secondary processor
sockets are located as shown in the figure below.
IMPORTANT: Any CPU is easily affected by static electricity.
Handle a CPU after making your body contact with a metallic frame
section of the server to discharge the static electricity on your body.
Do not make bare hands contact with the CPU pins. In addition, do
not put any CPU on a desk directly. See "Static Precautions" for
details of the static electricity.
Processor 1
Processor 2
Mother board
NOTE: If the different revision of the processor is installed in the
multiprocessor system, Windows logs the following information every
startup. If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.
Upgrading Your Server 9-29
Installation
Install a CPU in the following procedure.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the components as follows:
„
„
Side cover
Processor air duct
3.
Locate the CPU socket which you are going to install CPU.
4.
Raise the locking lever on the socket.
IMPORTANT: Open the lever until it stops. The bar can be opened to
approx. 120 degrees.
5.
Aligning the pins of the CPU with the socket, insert the CPU slowly and gently into the
socket.
IMPORTANT: Be aware of CPU direction. Pin layouts on two
corners among four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion.
Confirm the pin mark and pin layout on the socket, and insert the CPU
correctly.
Pin mark
9-30 Upgrading Your Server
6.
Push the CPU lightly to the socket, and push down the lever to secure the CPU.
7.
Put the heat sink on CPU.
NOTE: Be aware of direction of heat sink (see figure below).
Upgrading Your Server 9-31
8.
Secure four screws to fix the heat sink.
NOTE: Tighten four screws temporarily in the following order shown
in the figure below, and then completely tighten all screws.
9.
Make sure that the heat sink is level.
NOTES:
„
If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and then install it again. The
following probably causes the heat sink not to be level:
– The CPU is not positioned correctly.
– The wire clip is not engaged correctly.
„
Do not move the secured heat sink.
10.
Install the components you removed previously.
11.
Power on the server.
12.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and reboot the
system.
After rebooting the system, the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER menu appears on the screen.
13.
Click [End], and select [DOS].
14.
Enter as "cd SDR" against the prompt "Q:\>" and press Enter.
15.
Enter as "SDRUP" against the prompt "Q:\SDR>" and press Enter.
16.
Updating the configuration data is started.
If the following message is displayed on the way, press Enter to continue updating.
Password (Q to quit):
It takes about five to six minutes to complete updating.
9-32 Upgrading Your Server
17.
When the message "Programming complete, reboot server for normal operation" appears,
take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive, and press the
Reset button or cycle the power to reboot the system. (Resetting by Ctrl + Alt + Del will
not correctly update the configuration data.)
18.
Start SETUP and select [Server] → [Event Log Configuration] → [Clear All Event Logs]
to clear the event logs (see Chapter 4).
19.
Verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error
messages listed in Chapter 8.
20.
To add one or more CPUs to the server in 1-CPU configuration to operate the server with
more than one CPU, do the procedure below:
For Windows Server 2003 and Windows 2000, change the driver of [Computer] in the
device manager to [ACPI multi-processor PC] and then update the system (see Chapter 5).
Upgrading Your Server 9-33
Removal
To remove the CPU, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 and 7 in the installation procedure and
do the reverse procedure of steps 12 to 8. Remove the heat sink by using a flat-tip screwdriver for
the fixing metal fitting.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed.
„
After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of
the heat sink adhere to the CPU. To remove the heat sink from the
CPU, first turn the heat sink to the left and right lightly to make sure
that the heat sink can be apart from the CPU. Removing the heat
sink with it adhering to the CPU may cause the CPU and/or socket
to be defected.
Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed (or replaced).
1.
Update the configuration data according to Steps 11 to 17 described in the installation
procedure.
You do not need to update the configuration data when you replaced the CPU.
While updating is in progress, the STATUS lamp goes on amber, however, it is not the
problem. When you complete updating and reboot the system, the amber STATUS lamp
will go off. If the amber STATUS lamp still goes on, some server failure is assumed.
2.
After removing or reinstalling the processor, run the BIOS SETUP utility to observe the
processor status (see Chapter 4 for detail).
9-34 Upgrading Your Server
DIMM
The DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) is installed in a DIMM socket on the mother board
installed in the server.
The mother board contains six sockets in which DIMMs are installed. Two 256MB DIMM is
normally installed in DIMM #1A and #1B. (The DIMMs normally installed may be replaced.)
DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers.
Group 1
#1B
#1A
Group 2
#2B #2A
Mother board
Upgrading Your Server 9-35
IMPORTANT:
„
The DIMM is easily affected by static electricity. Handle the
DIMM after making your body contact with a metallic frame
section of the server to discharge the static electricity on your body.
Do not make bare hands contact with terminals and components on
the DIMM. In addition, do not put the DIMM on a desk directly.
See "Static Precautions" for details of the static electricity.
„
Do not use any DIMM not approved by NEC. If an unapproved
third party's DIMM is installed in the server, not only the DIMM but
also the server itself may be defected. You will be charged by any
repair of a malfunction or defect caused by such a device within the
warranty period.
Due to an interleave device, add two DIMMs in groups The server
does not operate if DIMMs of different specifications * are installed
in the same group.
„
*
The specification of a DIMM is described on the label put on the board
as follows:
Example: Frequency of 333 MHz, buffered, capacity of 512 MB,
raw address of 12 bits, column address of 10 bits, and
single side
333 / B / 512 / R12 C10 S
Single side
Column address
Raw address
Capacity
Buffered
Frequency
„
„
„
„
„
DIMMs must be populated in pairs and in the following order:
#1A and #1B, and then #2A and #2B.
Install DIMMs starting from the one having largest capacity.
In a maximum configuration, the larger memory size of DIMMs
must be installed in the slots #2A and #2B.
Installed DIMMs must be the same speed and must all be registered.
Take a note of beep code pattern, and take appropriate action
according to the table listed earlier in "Beep Codes".
NOTES:
„
Up to 8GB (2GB × 4) of memory can be added.
„
In the error messages and logs in POST, NEC ESMPRO Manager,
or Off-line Maintenance Utility, the DIMM connector may be called
group. The number next to a group meets the connector number in
the figure shown in the previous page.
9-36 Upgrading Your Server
Installation
Install a DIMM in the following procedure.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the components as follows:
„
Side cover
„
Processor air duct
3.
Confirm the socket in which a DIMM is installed.
4.
Open the levers at both ends of the socket.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the lever, do not apply an excess
force to the lever.
5.
Push the DIMM to the socket straight.
NOTE: Use extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying too
much pressure can damage the socket. Keyed DIMMs insert only one
way.
If the DIMM is inserted into the DIMM socket, the lever is automatically closed.
Upgrading Your Server 9-37
6.
Gently push the levers to the upright position until they engage the notches in the DIMM.
7.
Install the remove components.
8.
Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear
in POST.
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in
Chapter 8.
9.
Start SETUP to select "Advanced" → "Memory Configuration" on menus. Then make
sure that the status of the additional DIMM is set to "Normal" (see Chapter 4).
10.
When Windows 2003/2000 is used, set the paging file size to the recommended value or
larger.
Installed memory capacity × 1.5 for Windows 2003/2000 (See Chapter 5.)
9-38 Upgrading Your Server
Removal
Remove the DIMM depending on the following procedure.
NOTES:
„
To remove the defected DIMM, check the error message appearing
in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket (group) in
which the defected DIMM is installed.
„
The server operates only when at least one DIMM is installed.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the side cover.
3.
Expand the levers at the both ends of the socket for the DIMM to be removed leftward or
rightward
The lock is released to allow the DIMM to be removed.
4.
Install the components removed in step 2.
5.
Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear
in POST.
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in
Chapter 8.
6.
Start the SETUP to select "Advanced" → "Memory Configuration" → "Memory Retest"
on the menus to clear the error information on the removed DIMM (see Chapter 4).
Chapter 10
Internal Cabling Diagrams
Internal cable connections of the server are shown below.
10-2 Internal Cabling Diagrams
INTERFACE CABLES
An example of the connections of interface cables between devices within the server and external
devices is shown below.
Standard Configuration
The following shows an example of connection in the standard configuration:
The mother board has two serial ATA (SATA) connectors. "IDE" in the figure below is the primary
channel of Ultra ATA66 for the standard CD-ROM drive and optional PATA device.
Option
Mother board
Option
CD-ROM
5.25-inch
device bay
Option
Floppy
disk drive
3.5-inch
disk bay
SATA cable
Floppy disk drive cable
Internal Cabling Diagrams
10-3
SATA RAID Drive Configuration
Your server can contain up to four SATA hard disk drives if an optional SATA RAID controller is
installed.
You can configure the RAID controller with RAID levels of JBOD, RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5 by
running the RAID configuration utility.
Four explanations of RAID technology and utility, refer to the manual that was shipped with the
RAID controller.
Option
Mother board
Option
CD-ROM
5.25-inch
device bay
Option
Floppy
disk drive
3.5-inch
disk bay
SATA cable
Floppy disk drive cable
10-4 Internal Cabling Diagrams
SCSI Hard Disk Drive Configuration
You need an optional SCSI controller and internal SCSI cable to install a SCSI hard disk drive or
file device.
Set SCSI IDs as shown in the figure below. Set the terminating resistor (Enabled/Disabled) for the
last-connected device in the SCSI chain. Set "Disabled" for all the middle devices. A terminating
connector may be installed depending on the internal SCSI cable. If the SCSI cable ends with a
terminating resistor, set "Disabled" for all the terminating resistors of connected devices. For the
settings, see the manual provided with each device.
A file device needs settings such as a SCSI transfer rate. For the transfer rate, see the manual
provided with the file device. Use the BIOS utility of the SCSI controller to make the settings. For
details, see the manual provided with the SCSI controller.
Option
Mother board
Option
CD-ROM
5.25-inch
device bay
Option ID0
Terminator
Floppy
disk drive
Terminator
3.5-inch
disk bay
SATA cable
Floppy disk drive cable
SCSI cable
Internal Cabling Diagrams
10-5
An optional SCSI controller (N8103-65F) is available for continuous connection of the SCSI cable
from a hard disk drive to a file device. A maximum of three SCSI hard disk drives and one SCSI
backup device can be connected with one SCSI controller.
This server does not guarantee operation with SCSI and IDE hard disk drives being mixed. Use only
either of the interfaces.
Option
Mother board
Option
CD-ROM
Terminator
5.25-inch
device bay
Option ID3
Floppy
disk drive
3.5-inch
disk bay
SATA cable
Floppy disk drive cable
SCSI cable
10-6 Internal Cabling Diagrams
SCSI RAID Drive Configuration
Your server can contain up to four SCSI hard disk drives if an optional SCSI RAID controller is
installed.
You can configure the RAID controller with RAID levels of RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5 by
running the RAID configuration utility.
Four explanations of RAID the technology and utility, refer to manual that was shipped with the
RAID controller.
Option
Mother board
Option
CD-ROM
5.25-inch
device bay
Option
Floppy
disk drive
Terminator
3.5-inch
disk bay
SATA cable
Floppy disk drive cable
SCSI cable
Internal Cabling Diagrams
10-7
Hot-plug SCSI RAID Drive Configuration
The optional SCSI RAID controller, hot-plug SCSI HDD bay and SCSI cable allow your server to
contain a maximum of six hot-plug SCSI hard disk drives as shown in the figure below. The hard
disk drives installed in the HDD bay are controlled by the SCSI RAID controller with each of the
RAID level of RAID, RAID1 or RAID5.
Also, you can add a new hard disk drive or replace a failed hard disk drive with a new one without
powering down the system.
Option
Mother board
Option
CD-ROM
5.25-inch
device bay
Option
Floppy
disk drive
HDD cage
SATA cable
Floppy disk drive cable
SCSI cable
10-8 Internal Cabling Diagrams
POWER CABLE
Proper connector numbers of format Pnn (nn: numeral) are printed on the power cables connected to
the power unit installed in the server. The connector numbers and the built-in devices to which the
connectors are connected are shown in the figures below.
Standard Configuration
P5
Power supply
P2
P8
P1
Option
P6
Option
P3
CD-ROM
P4
Option
P7
5.25-inch
device bay
Floppy disk
drive
PCI #5
PCIe#4
PCI#3
PCI#2
PCI#1
SATA#1 SATA#2
Not used
IDE
Floppy disk
P9
P12
P13
P10
P11
Power cable
3.5-inch
disk bay
Internal Cabling Diagrams
10-9
Hot-plug SCSI RAID Drive Configuration
Power supply
P12
P13
P2
P8
P1
P5
Option
P6
Option
P3
CD-ROM
P4
Option
P7
5.25-inch
device bay
Floppy disk
drive
PCI #5
PCIe#4
PCI#3
PCI#2
PCI#1
SATA#1 SATA#2
Not used
IDE
Floppy disk
P9
P10
P11
Power cable
3.5-inch
disk bay
10-10 Internal Cabling Diagrams
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
CPU
Type
Standard
Maximum
Chipset
Memory
Standard
Maximum
Expansion unit
Expansion times
Memory module
Error check
Graphics (VRAM)
Auxiliary
Floppy disk (standard)
input device Hard disk (standard)
Hard disk (maximum)
RAID
Hot-plug
CD-ROM (standard)
5.25-inch file bay
3.5-inch disk bay
Additional
PCI (64-bit/66MHz)
slot
PCI (32-bit/33MHz)
PCI EXPRESS (x4)
LAN interface
External
Keyboard
interface
Mouse
USB
Serial
Network
Display
Cabinet design
External dimensions
Weight (Max.)
Power supply
Power consumption
Environmental
Temperature
requirements
Humidity
Others
NEC Express5800/120Eg
N8100-1078F
N8100-1079F
Intel Xeon processor
Intel Xeon processor
(3.20DGHz/1MB)
(3.60GHz/2MB)
1
2
Intel E7320
512 MB (256 MB × 2)
8 GB (The standard DIMM must be replaced.)
2 DIMMs (512/1024/2048MB)
1 time
SDRAM DIMM (DDR333, Buffered type, Registered)
ECC
ATI RAGE XL (VRAM 8MB)
3.5-inch drive × 1 (standard)
None
Factory-installed (SATA): 500GB (250GB×2)
Option (SATA RAID): 1TB (250GB×4)
Option (SCSI/SCSI RAID): 1.2TB (300GB×4)
Option (SCSI RAID + HDD cage): 1.8TB (300GB×6)*
Option
Option (SCSI)
ATAPI interface × 1 (x40 speed)
4 slots (A standard CD-ROM drive is installed. Maximums of two backup
file devices are installed.)
4 slots (6 slots max.*)
2 slots
2 slots
Cannot be used
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T × 1
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
4-pin (2 ports)
D-sub 9-pin (2 ports)
RJ-45 (1 port)
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)
Desk-side, mini tower
292.1* (width) × 453 (height) × 681 (depth) mm
* including stabilizers
23 kg (33 kg)
100 to 120 VAC ±10%, 200 to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1 Hz
640 VA, 625 W
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER supported, NEC ESMPRO provided in the
standard configuration
* The optional hot-plug HDD cage is installed.
A-2 Specifications
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Appendix B
Other Precautions
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller
The onboard network interface controller supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T
networks and a capable of full or half duplex.
The controller can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected
to the HUB. However, for proper network operation, specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value the
same as the value specified for HUB.
Server Management Software
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO
utility.
NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability
enhancement features of the server.
Floppy Disk
The following describes use of the floppy disk.
Floppy disk type
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy
disks:
„
„
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44MB.
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Stores data of 720KB.
Shutter
Insertion direction
indicator
Catching hole
Head window
Centering hub
Label
Centering hole
High-density media hole
(2HD only)
Write protection
hole
Front
Write protection switch
Rear
B-2 Other Precautions
Notes on use
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep
the following notes in mind to use it:
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.
„
Attach the label to the correct position.
„
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.
„
Do not open the shutter.
„
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
„
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
„
Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette
smoke.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a
chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them.
„
Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.
„
Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.
„
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.
Other Precautions B-3
„
Write-protection
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental
erasure.
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the
floppy disk or format it. NEC recommends that you should write-protect any floppy disk
containing valuable data unless you are about to save data.
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.
„
Disk format
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to
initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment (operating
system).
IMPORTANT:
„
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if
any.
„
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not
available with the server. Use a formatted floppy disk to work
with it on the DOS command line.
The format method depends on your operating system.
with your operating system for details.
„
Refer to the manual that comes
Data backup
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk,
digital audio tape, or magnet-optical disk).
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy
disk, if provided.
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as
operator's misconduct or sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data,
NEC recommends that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a
regular basis.
B-4 Other Precautions
CD-ROM
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD-ROM for the server:
„
Press the center of the storage case to remove the CD-ROM from the case.
„
Do not drop the CD-ROM.
„
Do not place anything on the CD-ROM or bend the CD-ROM.
„
Do not attach any label onto the CD-ROM.
„
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
„
Place the CD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
„
Do not scratch the CD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point
pen.
„
Do not leave the CD-ROM with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette
smoke.
„
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD-ROM, wipe the CD-ROM from its
center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.
„
Use the CD cleaner to clean the CD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or
thinner.
„
Keep the CD-ROM in a CD-ROM case when not in use.
Tape Media
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the
server.
„
Saving your valuable data
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save
them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as
well as to protect your valuable data and programs from loss.
„
Three-generation data management
NEC recommends that you should employ three-generation data management for data
storage.
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save
data to tape A on the first day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on
the forth day, and so on. That is, you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape
A through C.
Other Precautions B-5
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read
error. Also when both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable
data by using the data stored in tape A.
Keyboard
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the
keyboard. Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard.
„
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of
an angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy
to operate. The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your
shoulders, arms, and fingers.
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the
manual that comes with the software for details.
B-6 Other Precautions
Mouse
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer.
software require the mouse for operation.
Many OS's and application
NOTE:
„
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the
software. For details, refer to the manual provided with the
software.
„
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or
dirty desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the
mouse. When your mouse movement seems dull, clean your
mouse. (See Chapter 7.)
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."
Click:
Press the button only once and release it.
Double-click:
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.
Drag:
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the
keyboard.
Click
Pressing
Click
Click
Click
Double-click
Drag
Appendix C
IRQ and I/O Port Address
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below.
to install an optional device.
Find an appropriate one
Interrupt Request
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:
IRQ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Peripheral Device (Controller)
System timer
Keyboard
Reserved
COMB serial port (PCI)
COMA serial port (PCI)
Reserved
Floppy disk
Reserved
IRQ
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Peripheral Device (Controller)
Real-time clock
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Mouse
Numeric processor
P-IDE
S-IDE
C-2 IRQ and I/O Port Address
I/O Port Address
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:
Address(es)
0000h – 000Fh
0010h – 001Fh
0020h – 0021h
0022h – 0023h
0024h – 0025h
0026h – 0027h
0028h – 0029h
002Ah – 002Bh
002Ch – 002Dh
002Eh – 002Fh
0030h – 0031h
0032h – 0033h
0034h – 0035h
0036h – 0037h
0038h – 0039h
003Ah – 003Bh
003Ch – 003Dh
003Eh – 003Fh
0040h – 0043h
0044h – 004Fh
0050h – 0053F
0054h – 005Fh
0060h, 0064h
0061h
0063h
0065h
0067h
0070h
0072h
0074h
0076h
0071h
0073h
0075h
0077h
0080h – 0081h
0080h – 008F
0090h – 0091h
0092h
0093h – 009Fh
0094h
00A0h – 00A1h
00A4h – 00A5h
00A8h – 00A9h
Resource
DMA Controller 1
DMA Controller 2
Interrupt Controller 1
Notes
Interrupt Controller 1
Aliased from 0020 – 0021h
Interrupt Controller 1
Aliased from 0020h – 0021h
Interrupt Controller 1
Super I/O (SIO) index and Data ports
Interrupt Controller 1
Aliased from 0020h – 0021h
Aliased from 0020h – 0021h
Interrupt Controller 1
Aliased from 0020h – 0021h
Interrupt Controller 1
Aliased from 0020h – 0021h
Interrupt Controller 1
Aliased from 0020h – 0021h
Aliased from 0000h – 000Fh
Programmable Timers
Programmable Timers
Keyboard Controller
NMI Status & Control Register
NMI Status & Control Register
NMI Status & Control Register
NMI Status & Control Register
NMI Mask (bit 7) & RTC address (bits 6::0)
NMI Mask (bit 7) & RTC address (bits 6::0)
NMI Mask (bit 7) & RTC address (bits 6::0)
NMI Mask (bit 7) & RTC address (bits 6::0)
RTC Data
RTC Data
RTC Data
RTC Data
BIOS Timer
DMA Low Page Register
DMA Low Page Register (aliased)
System Control Port A (PC-AT control Port)
(this port not aliased in DMA range)
DMA Low Page Register (aliased)
Video Display Controller
Interrupt Controller 2
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
Keyboard chip select from 87417
Aliased
Aliased
Aliased
Aliased from 0070h
Aliased from 0070h
Aliased from 0070h
Aliased from 0071h
Aliased from 0071h
Aliased from 0071h
IRQ and I/O Port Address C-3
Address(es)
00ACh – 00ADh
00B0h – 00B1h
00B4h – 00B5h
00B8h – 00B9h
00BCh – 00BDh
00C0h – 00DFh
00F0h
00F8h – 00FFh
0102h
0170h – 0177h
01F0h – 01F7h
0200h – 0207h
0220h – 022Fh
0238h – 023Fh
0278h – 027Fh
0290h – 0298h
02E8h – 02EFh
02F8h – 02FFh
0338h – 033Fh
0370h – 0375h
0376h
0377h
0378h – 037Fh
03B4h – 03Bah
03BCh – 03BFh
03C0h – 03CFh
03D4h – 03Dah
03E8h – 03Efh
03F0h – 03F5h
03F6h – 03F7h
03F8h – 03FFh
0400h – 043Fh
0461h
0480h – 048Fh
04C0h – 04CFh
04D0h – 04D1h
04D4h – 04D7h
04D8h – 04DFh
04E0h – 04FFh
051Ch
0678h – 067Ah
0778h – 077Ah
07BCh – 07Beh
0CF8h
0CF9h
0CFCh
Resource
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
Interrupt Controller 2 (aliased)
DMA Controller 2
Clear NPX error
X87 Numeric Coprocessor
Video Display Controller
Secondary Fixed Disk Controller (IDE)
Primary Fixed Disk Controller (IDE)
Game I/O Port
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Parallel Port 3
NS HW monitor
Serial Port B
Serial Port B
Serial Port B
Secondary Floppy
Secondary IDE
Secondary IDE/Floppy
Parallel Port 2
Monochrome Display Port
Parallel Port 1 (Primary)
Video Display Controller
Color Graphics Controller
Serial Port A
Floppy Disk Controller
Primary IDE – Sec Floppy
Serial Port A (primary)
DMA Controller 1, Extended Mode Registers
Extended NMI / Reset Control
DMA High Page Register
DMA Controller 2, High Base Register
Interrupt Controllers 1 and 2 Control Register
DMA Controller 2, Extended Mode Register
Reserved
DMA Channel Stop Registers
Software NMI (051Ch)
Parallel Port (ECP)
Parallel Port (ECP)
Parallel Port (ECP)
PCI CONFIG_ADDRESS Register
Intel® Server Board SUNPRAIRIE Turbo and
Reset Control
PCI CONFIG_DATA Register
Notes
Resets IRQ13
C-4 IRQ and I/O Port Address
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Appendix D
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions without
using ExpressSetup tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 x64
EDITIONS
Read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions Installation.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional
boards;
„
Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
– N8103-75F SCSI Controller
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller
– SATA HostRAID (Onboard Adaptec HostRAID controller)
„
Other optional boards
– N8103-56F SCSI Controller
Updating System
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM attached to your system.
D-2 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic
Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS
newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.
Manual Installation when SATA HostRAID and N8103-75/80F/95 Keeps
Connection
If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process, pop-up messages may appear.
This does not affect on system behavior. Click [YES] and continue the installation. Follow the
message hereafter.
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file
system will not be converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from
the beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,
such as DAT.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
D-3
Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following
formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
+ Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 4100MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 1MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file with
initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is
required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory
mounted is '2048MB + 1MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the
above formula as follows:
4100MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 1MB) + Application Size
= 5381MB + Application Size
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2.
See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to
be written to a separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after
installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an
additional new disk.)
D-4 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 x64 EDITIONS
Preparations for Installation
„
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
„
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEMDISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server
which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, you
do not need to create it again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with
the following two procedures.
„
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server,
you can use the other procedure described later.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server. (You may also
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6.
Select [Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER]
from [Create Support Disk] menu.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
7.
D-5
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be
created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
„
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server 2003
– Windows 2000
– Windows Me/98/95
– Windows NT 4.0
– Windows XP x64 Edition
– Windows XP
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which
the above operating systems operate.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Run the operating system.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
4.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for
Windows Server 2003 x64].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the
Right-click.
5.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be
created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
D-6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4.
If the RAID controller (including embedded HostRAID feature) or SCSI controller is
installed in the system, press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the
following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5.
When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
into the floppy disk drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
7.
D-7
Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 RAID Controller Driver
(When N8103-80F board is installed.)
– Adaptec SATA Driver v1.00 (Windows EM64T/AMD64 for 2003)
(When HostRAID is installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and
Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.
This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical
drives exist.
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1.
Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.
2.
Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following
message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and
unpartitioned space on this computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
*
3.
Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper
drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this
chapter.
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for
Modifying the Drive Letter".
D-8 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following
procedure.
1.
Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start
[Computer Management].
2.
Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3.
Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive
Letter and Path...].
4.
Click [Yes].
5.
Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
If the following message appears, click [Yes].
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8.
Close the [Computer Management].
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
D-9
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
1.
Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member
of the Administrators group.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen.
3.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NEC Express5800 system]
section.
4.
Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5.
Click on [Restart Computer] to restart the system.
6.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately
after clicking on [Restart Computer]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by
adding or removing hardware or Operating system software
components) or repair the system, you must run the system update
again.
D-10 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please
refer to the document attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any
trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS1\PROSET\WS03_32E
The [Intel(R) PROSet - Install Shield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Install].
7.
When [Install Shield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
8.
Restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
D-11
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click
[Local Area Connection].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.
2.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
Open the [Device Manager]
2.
Double Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Link] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the
value specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that
the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This tool
is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on how to
install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described later in
this chapter.
D-12 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-112/103/113), the network driver will be
installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be used.
If you want to utilize optional Network Board (N8104-86/111), install the driver stored in NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
In case of utilizing (N8104-86/111)
"CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS1\PRO100\WS03_32E"
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the
section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Click [Network adapters] and double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.
NOTE: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter. All
other names show the Optional Network Board.
3.
Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard] appears.
4.
Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button and click
[Next].
5.
Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the
[Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
6.
Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [(N810486/111)], specify [CD-ROM driveletter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS1\PRO100\WS03_32E].
Then click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
D-13
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-75F/95)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-75F/95), update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F)
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows 2003, connect the controller
and take the following steps to install the driver:
1.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].
2.
When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a
suitable driver for my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3.
When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert
"Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy
disk drive, and click [Next].
4.
When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].
5.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection
wizard] dialog box below appears. Click [Complete].
D-14 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
Appendix E
Installing Windows Server 2003
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 without using Express
Setup tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server 2003
Installation.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional
boards;
„
Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
– N8103-65F SCSI Controller
– N8103-75F SCSI Controller
– N8103-95 SCSI Controller
– N8103-78F Disk Array Controller (SATA)
– N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)
– N8103-89 Disk Array Controller (SATA)
– SATA HostRAID (Onboard Adaptec HostRAID controller)
„
Other optional boards
– N8103-56F SCSI Controller
Installing Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your
system, prepare it by yourself.
E-2 Installing Windows Server 2003
Updating System
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM attached to your system.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic
Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS
newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.
Manual Installation when S-ATA HostRAID and N810365F/75/78F/80F/89 Keeps Connection
If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process, pop-up messages may appear.
This does not affect on system behavior. Click [YES] and continue the installation. Follow the
message hereafter.
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file
system will not be converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from
the beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,
such as DAT.
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-3
Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following
formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
+ Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 1000MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file with
initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is
required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify
4095MB for the paging file size.
„
The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the
above formula as follows:
1000MB + (512MB * 1.5) + 512MB + 12MB + Application Size
= 2292MB + Application Size
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2.
See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to
be written to a separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after
installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an
additional new disk.)
E-4 Installing Windows Server 2003
INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003
Preparations for Installation
„
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
„
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server which you
are going to install Windows Server 2003, you do not need to create it
again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the
following two procedures.
„
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK
for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server,
you can use the other procedure described later.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the server. (You may also
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6.
Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create
Support Disk] menu.
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-5
7.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
„
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server 2003
– Windows 2000
– Windows Me/98/95
– Windows NT 4.0
– Windows XP x64 Edition
– Windows XP
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from
[Master Control Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operating systems
operate.
Follow the steps below.
8.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
9.
Run the operating system.
10.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
11.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for
Windows Server 2003].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the
Right-click.
12.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
E-6 Installing Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4.
If the RAID controller (including embedded HostRAID feature) or SCSI controller is
installed in the system, press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the
following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5.
When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the
floppy disk drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-7
7.
Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 RAID Controller
(When N8103-80F board is installed.)
– Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards
(WinXP/Server 2003 IA-32) (When N8103-75F board is installed.)
– INITIO INI-A10XU2W SCSI Host Adapter
(When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– Promise FastTrak S150 SX4(tm) Controller-Intel x86 platform
(When N8103-78F board is installed.)
– Promise FastTrak S150 SX4100(tm) Controller-Intel x86 platform
(When N8103-89 board is installed.)
– Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver for Windows 2000/XP/2003
(When HostRAID is installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver
Installation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.
E-8 Installing Windows Server 2003
Upgrade Installation
Procedures below upgrade the installed Windows 2000 to Windows Server 2003.
1.
Power on the system and start Windows 2000.
2.
Log on as an administrator.
3.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Then, [Select an operation] dialog will appear.
NOTE: If the [Select an operation] dialog box does not appear, start
\SETUP.EXE from CD-ROM drive.
4.
Select [Install Windows Server 2003].
Then, a dialog box asks to select the upgrade or clear installation.
5.
Select "Upgrade (recommended)" and click the Next.
Follow the messages and continue. The system will automatically restart after copying
the files.
NOTE: You can leave the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM in CDROM drive.
6.
If the RAID controller (including embedded HostRAID feature) is installed in the system,
press F6 while a message, "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration...",
is on the screen.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
7.
When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
8.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy
disk drive, and press Enter. A list of SCSI adapters will be displayed.
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-9
9.
If the optional board is installed, select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (WinXP/Server 2003 IA-32) (When N8103-75F board is
installed.)
– LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86) (When N8103-80F board is
installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.
10.
Update the system.
11.
Install the driver and make detailed settings.
„
If PROSet is already installed, uninstall the PROSet before upgrading.
If the teaming function is enabled, disable the function before uninstalling PROSet.
„
During upgrade installation, [Disk Insert] dialog box may appear.
If it appears, click Cancel.
„
When upgrade installation is completed, [Device Driver Wizard] dialog box may appear.
If it appears, click Cancel, then update the system.
E-10 Installing Windows Server 2003
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical drives
This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical
drives exist.
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1.
Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.
2.
Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following
message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and
unpartitioned space on this computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
*
3.
Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper
drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this
chapter.
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for
Modifying the Drive Letter".
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-11
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following
procedure.
1.
Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start
[Computer Management].
2.
Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3.
Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive
Letter and Path...].
4.
Click [Yes].
5.
Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
If the following message appears, click [Yes].
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8.
Close the [Computer Management].
E-12 Installing Windows Server 2003
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
1.
Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member
of the Administrators group.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen.
3.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NEC Express5800 system]
section.
4.
Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5.
Click on [Restart Computer] to restart the system.
6.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately
after clicking on [Restart Computer]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by
adding or removing hardware or Operating system software
components) or repair the system, you must run the system update
again.
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-13
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please
refer to the document attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any
trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.
CD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\DOTNET\BC3\PROSET\WS03XP32
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9.
Restart the system.
E-14 Installing Windows Server 2003
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
1. Click Start menu, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click
[Local Area Connection].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, Click [Settings] and Click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.
2.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
The [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] dialog box appears.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] window.
2.
Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Speed] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the
value specified for HUB.
4.
Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-15
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the
packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or
receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setup for Trouble
Process" later in this document.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-65F/75)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel]→ [Administrative Tools]
→[Computer Management].
2.
Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.
3.
Click [Update Driver].
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5.
Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Have Disk..].
7.
Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy
disk drive, enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].
8.
Specify the following driver and click [Next].
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller]
(When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– [Adaptec SCSI Card 29320ALP -Ultra320 SCSI]
(When N8103-75 board is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.
E-16 Installing Windows Server 2003
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-56F/95)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-56F/95), update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F)
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows 2003, connect the controller
and take the following steps to install the driver:
1.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].
2.
When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a
suitable driver for my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3.
When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert
"Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk
drive, and click [Next].
4.
When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].
5.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection
wizard] dialog box below appears. Click [Complete].
Installing Windows Server 2003 E-17
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini
files"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in
Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension
switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2.
In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3.
Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].
4.
Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, Standard" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, Standard, PAE"
/fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you
can make your system start automatically from the switch you
specified.
E-18 Installing Windows Server 2003
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
Appendix F
Installing Windows 2000
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows 2000 without using Express Setup
tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS 2000
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows 2000
Installation.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional
boards;
„
Supporting installation of OS in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
„
N8103-65F SCSI Controller
N8103-75F SCSI Controller
N8103-95 SCSI Controller
N8103-78F Disk Array Controller (SATA)
N8103-80F Disk Array Controller (SCSI 1ch)
N8103-89 Disk Array Controller (SATA)
SATA HostRAID (Onboard Adaptec HostRAID controller)
Other optional boards
– N8103-56F SCSI Controller
Installing Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your
system, prepare it by yourself.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to confirm the following items before
applying Service Pack to your system.
This system does not support Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 - 3.
If you install Windows 2000 CD-ROM which contains Service Pack 4
to your system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again.
F-2 Installing Windows 2000
Updating System
If you change the configuration of the system, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM attached to your system.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic
Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS
newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.
Manual Installation when S-ATA HostRAID and
N8103-65F/75/78F/80F/89 Keeps Connection
If you keep those controllers connecting during installation process, pop-up messages may appear.
This does not affect on system behavior. Click [YES] and continue the installation. Follow the
message hereafter.
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file
system will not be converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from
the beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the OS installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for OS installation to the system,
such as DAT.
Installing Windows 2000 F-3
Partition Size
The minimum required partition size for installation of Windows 2000 is:
1000MB + Paging file size + Dump file size
Paging file size (recommended) = Mounted memory size * 1.5
Dump file size
= Mounted memory size + 12 MB
IMPORTANT:
„ The above paging file size is necessary for collecting debug
information (memory dump). If you set the default value of
paging file size smaller than the 'recommended' value, the accurate
debug information (memory dump) may not be collected.
„ The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify
4095MB for the paging file size.
„ The dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory
mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.
„ If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if installed memory size is 512MB, the minimum required partition size is
1000MB + (512MB*1.5) + (512MB+12) = 2292MB.
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2.
See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to
be written to a separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after
installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an
additional new disk.)
F-4 Installing Windows 2000
INSTALLING WINDOWS 2000
Preparations for Installation
„
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
„
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (CD-ROM)
„
Windows 2000 Service Pack (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server which you are
going to install Windows 2000, you do not need to create it again.
You can create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two
procedures.
„
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server,
you can use the other procedure described later.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6.
Select [Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support
Disk] menu.
Installing Windows 2000 F-5
7.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the instruction on the screen.
Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
„
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server 2003
– Windows 2000
– Windows Me/98/95
– Windows NT 4.0
– Windows XP x64 Edition
– Windows XP
You can create Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master
Control Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Run the operating system.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
4.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for
Windows 2000].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the
Right-click.
5.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
F-6 Installing Windows 2000
Windows 2000 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows 2000.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows 2000 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while
the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows 2000 setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4.
If the RAID controller (including embedded HostRAID feature) or SCSI controller is
installed in the system, press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the
following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5.
When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6.
Insert the Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for NEC EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk
drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Installing Windows 2000 F-7
7.
Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-1 Controller Driver
(When N8103-80F board is installed.)
– INITIO INI-A10XU2W SCSI Host Adapter
(When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000)
(When N8103-75F board is installed.)
– Windows Promise FastTrak S150 SX4 Controller
(When N8103-78F board is installed.)
– Promise FastTrak S150 SX4100(tm) Controller-Intel x86 platform
(When N8103-89 board is installed.)
– Adaptec Embedded Serial ATA HostRAID Driver for Windows 2000/XP/2003
(When HostRAID is installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and
Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this manual.
F-8 Installing Windows 2000
Reinstallation to Multiple Logical Drives
This subsection describes the procedure for reinstalling the operation system if the multiple logical
drives exist.
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1.
Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.
2.
Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following
message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and
unpartitioned space on this computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
*
3.
Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper
drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described earlier in this
chapter.
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for
Modifying the Drive Letter".
Installing Windows 2000 F-9
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following
procedure.
1.
Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start [Computer
Management].
2.
Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3.
Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive
Letter and Path...].
4.
Click [Yes].
5.
Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
If the following message appears, click [Yes].
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8.
Close the [Computer Management].
F-10 Installing Windows 2000
Updating the System - Installing Service Pack To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to confirm the following items before
applying Service Pack to your system.
This system does not support Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 - 3.
If you install Windows 2000 CD-ROM which contains Service Pack 4
to your system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 4 again.
1.
Logon to the system using the administrator account or other account which is a member
of the Administrators group.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically appeared on the screen.
3.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click on [Update NEC Express5800 system]
section.
4.
Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5.
Click on [Restart Computer] to restart the system.
6.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive immediately
after clicking on [Restart Computer]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by
adding or removing hardware or Operating system software
components) or repair the system, you must run the system update
again.
Installing Windows 2000 F-11
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please
refer to the document attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver. Be sure to
install. Utilizing PROSet enables the following issues:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Specify teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server an environment tolerant on
any trouble and enhances through put between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Start menu, point to [Program], [Accessory] and click [Explorer].
3.
Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory.
<CD-ROM DriveLetter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PROSET\WIN2K\
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9.
Restart the system.
F-12 Installing Windows 2000
Network Driver
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
Click Start menu and click [Network and Dial-Up Connection].
The [Network and Dial-Up Connection] dialog box appears.
2.
Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from pop-up menu.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
4.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
5.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
6.
Click [OK] on the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary. You can operate the process from
[Network and Dial-up Connection] to display the property dialog box for local area network.
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at
[AddingServices]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the
packet) that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or
receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setup for Trouble
Process" later in this document.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet Wired] on the [Control Panel] window.
The [Intel(R) PROSet for Wired Connections] dialog box appears. Double-click the
[Intel(R) PROSet Wired] icon.
2.
Put the cursor to the network driver in the list.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
Also specify the other network driver with the same progress above.
Installing Windows 2000 F-13
Re-install the Network Driver
After installing OS and deleting the network drivers, if you want to re-install the network drivers,
follow the procedure below.
1.
Restart OS and logon to your system.
2.
[Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box appears.
Click [Next].
3.
Confirm that the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)] radio button
is selected and click [Next].
4.
Select the [Specify a location] check box and deselect other check boxes.
Click [Next].
5.
Other [Upgrade Device Driver Wizard] dialog box opens.
When using [Intel(R) PRO/1000MT Network Connection], specify [<CD-ROM Drive
Letter>:\WINNT\W2K\BC3\PRO1000\WIN2K].
Then click [OK].
6.
Click [Next].
7.
Click [Finished].
After re-installing the network drivers, the link speed and Duplex mode need to be
specified.
Refer to "Network Driver" described earlier.
Graphics Accelerator Driver
Install the display driver using the following procedure.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Run the "CD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K\VIDEO\SETUP.EXE".
Follow the message on the screen.
When the message "Digital Signature Not Found" message appears, click on [Yes].
3.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the system following a
message on the screen.
F-14 Installing Windows 2000
USB 2.0 Driver
USB 2.0 Driver is pre-installed. When restoring the system or re-installing the system, the driver is
automatically installed in the process of updating the system.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-65F/75)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-65F/75), install it according to the following procedure:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel]→ [Administrative Tools]
→[Computer Management].
2.
Double-click the SCSI Controller driver which Device Manager lists as unknown device.
3.
Click [Update Driver].
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific
location [Advanced]" and click [Next].
5.
Select "Don't search. I will choose the driver to install" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Have Disk..].
7.
Insert "Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive,
enter "a:\" into "copy manufacturer's file from:" and click [OK].
8.
Specify the following driver and click [Next].
– [INITIO INI-A10XU2W PCI SCSI Controller]
(When N8103-65F board is installed.)
– [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Win2000]
(When N8103-75 board is installed.)
The installation of the driver is completed.
Restart the system according to the message appeared on the screen.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-56F/95)
If you utilize SCSI controller driver (N8103-56F/95), update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Windows 2000 F-15
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-80F)
To additionally install the N8103-80F in a system containing Windows 2000, connect the controller
and take the following steps to install the driver:
1.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next].
2.
When the [Install Hardware Device Drivers] dialog box appears, select [Search for a
suitable driver for my device (Recommended)], and click [Next].
3.
When the [Locate Driver Files] dialog box appears, select [Floppy disk drives], insert
"Windows 2000 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and
click [Next].
4.
When the [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears, click [Next].
5.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completion of the new hardware detection
wizard] dialog box below appears. Click [Complete].
F-16 Installing Windows 2000
Available Switch Options for Windows 2000 Boot.ini File
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini File.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 170756
"Available Switch Options for the Windows NT Boot.ini File"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in
Boot.ini file will enable the system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Aritcle ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension
switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Notepad].
2.
On the [File] menu, click [Open...].
3.
In the [Open] dialog box, in the [Look in] drop-down list box, click "%systemroot%"
drive.
4.
In the [Open] dialog box, in the [Files of type] drop-down list box, click "All Files" and in
the [File name] drop-down list box, enter "Boot.ini". And then, click [Open].
The content of Boot.ini file will be displayed.
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT="Windows 2000 Server" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT="Windows 2000 Server, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you
can make your system start automatically from the switch you
specified.
Installing Windows 2000 F-17
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
F-18 Installing Windows 2000
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Appendix G
Product Configuration Record Table
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.
Hardware
Main Unit
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
#1
Clock
Serial No.
Date Installed
#2
Clock
Serial No.
Date Installed
#1A
Size
Serial No.
Date Installed
#1B
Size
Serial No.
Date Installed
#2A
Size
Serial No.
Date Installed
#2B
Size
Serial No.
Date Installed
Type
Model name
Serial No.
CPU
Memory
Monitor
Date Installed
Hard Disk (Standard Interface (SATA))
Channel 1
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
Channel 2
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
G-2 Product Configuration Record Table
Hard Disk (optional SCSI controller installed)
ID0
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
ID1
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
ID2
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
ID3
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
ID4
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
ID5
Type
Serial No.
Capacity
Date Installed
Type number
5.25-inch Device
Slot 1
Slot 2
Size
Capacity
Model name
Type number
Serial No.
Date Installed
Size
Capacity
Serial No.
Model name
Type number
Date Installed
Slot 3 (standard Size
Capacity
Serial No.
ATAPI CD-ROM
Model name
drive)
Type number
Date Installed
Slot 4
Size
Capacity
Serial No.
Model name
Type number
Date Installed
PCI-X Slot #1
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI-X Slot #2
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #3
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCIe Slot #4
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #5
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Product Configuration Record Table
Printer
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date Installed
Additional Cabinet for Disk
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
External Peripheral Device 1
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date Installed
External Peripheral Device 2
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date Installed
External Peripheral Device 3
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date Installed
External Peripheral Device 4
Model name
Serial No.
Manufacturer
Date Installed
G-3
G-4 Product Configuration Record Table
Software
Firmware version
OS
Application of RUR media
File system
Bundled software installed
Licensed software installed
Application running when a failure
occurred
Remarks
† Apply
† FAT
† Others (
Name:
Name:
† HPFS
Version:
Version:
† NTFS
)
Download PDF
Similar pages